BL-1300 Um 374GB GB WW 1123-1

374GB
Laser Bar Code Reader
BL-1300 Series
Users Manual
Read this manual before using the system in order to
achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Introduction
This instruction manual describes the connection/wiring procedure, setting instructions, and
precautions for using the BL-1300 Series Laser Bar Code Reader. Before using the BL-1300 Series, it
is important to read this manual carefully to ensure maximum performance. Keep this manual in a
safe place for quick reference.
General Precautions
Take appropriate safety measures to avoid any damage in unlikely event of malfunction.
Do not modify the BL-1300 Series or use it in any way other than described in the specifications.
Otherwise, the functions and performance cannot be guaranteed.
When the BL-1300 Series is used in combination with other instruments, the functions and
performance may be degraded, depending on the operating conditions and surrounding
environment.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written
permission of KEYENCE Corporation.
The content of this manual is subject to change without notice.
Safety Information for BL-1300 Series
Safety precautions on laser product
CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The BL-1300 Series Laser Bar Code Reader uses a visible semiconductor laser as a light source.
Model BL-1300, 1301, 1300HA, 1301HA, 1350HA, 1351HA, 1370, 1371

Wavelength 660 nm
Output 85 W
Pulse duration 112 s
FDA (CDRH)
Class 2 Laser Product
Laser Class Part 1040.10
IEC 60825-1 Class 2 Laser Product
WARNING Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual. Otherwise, injury to the human
body (eyes and skin) may result.
Precautions on class 2 laser products
Do not stare into the beam.
Do not direct the beam at other people or into areas where other people
unconnected with the laser work might be present.
Be careful of the path of the laser beam.
If there is a danger that the operator may be exposed to the laser beam
reflected by specular or diffuse reflection, block the beam by installing an
enclosure with the appropriate reflectance.
Install the products so that the path of the laser beam is not as the same height
as that of human eye.
Do not disassemble this product. Laser emission from this product is not
automatically stopped when it is disassembled.
Laser emission warning LED (LASER LED)

While the laser beam is emitted, the laser emission warning LED (LASER LED) lights. The status of
the LED light can be recognized through laser protective goggles specifically designed for the
wavelength of 660 nm.
Laser forced OFF command
When working near the laser beam path, the laser forced OFF command can be sent to the BL-
1300 Series to force the laser beam emission to stop. This can help prevent the users eyes from
being exposed to the laser beam.
* While the laser beam emission is forced to stop, the bottom STABILITY LED flashes.
374GB 1
IEC warning/explanatory label locations
BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA

1370/1371
Use the suitable IEC warning/explanatory label included in the package of this product according to
the countries and/or regions where this product is used.
In this case, it can be affixed on the IEC warning/explanatory label, which has already been affixed to
this product.
2
Precautions on Proper Use
CAUTION Precautions on use

Do not use power supply voltage other than 5 V DC for the BL-1300 Series. Using
any supply voltage othe than 5 V DC may damage the unit.
When the BL-1300 reader head is connected to a dedicated communication unit
(N-R2, N-R4, N-UB, N-L1, NX-50 Series or DV-90 Series), be sure to supply
power according to the respective communication units specifications.
Before connecting or disconnecting a cable, be sure to turn off the power supplied
to the BL-1300 Series. Otherwise, the BL-1300 Series may be damaged.
Do not disassemble or modify the BL-1300 Series, as this may cause product
failure.
Keep cables far away as possible from high-voltage lines and power sources.
Otherwise, electrical noise can be generated that may cause product failure or
malfunction.
When mounting the BL-1300 Series, be sure to electrically insulate it from the
mounting surface. Otherwise, electrical noise can be generated that may cause
product failure or malfunction.
The BL-1300 Series is a precision instrument. Be
careful not to drop it or expose it to excessive shock.
Take great caution especially when you unpack, carry,
or install it.
Do not carry the BL-1300 Series by the cables.

The units may hit each other and become damaged.
Measures against abnormal conditions

If any of the following conditions are encountered, turn off the power supply
immediately. Continuing the use of the BL-1300 Series under abnormal conditions
may cause fire, electric shock, or product breakdown.
Contact your nearest KEYENCE sales office for repair.
When water or foreign matter enters the BL-1300 Series
When the BL-1300 Series is dropped or is damaged
When the BL-1300 Series emits smoke or an abnormal smell
3
Overseas Regulations and Standards
BL-1300 Series
UL certification
The BL-1300 Series complies with the following UL/CSA standards and has obtained the UL/C-UL
certifications.
Applicable standardsUL508, UL60950-1
UL File No. E207185, E167973
UL category NRAQ/NRAQ7, NWGQ2/NWGQ8
Be sure to observe the following installation and environment conditions.
Be sure to use a power supply that provides class 2 output as defined in NFPA70 (NEC: National
Electrical Code).
Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category I
FDA regulations
The BL-1300 Series is classified as class 2 laser product. The classification is based on IEC60825-1
following the Laser Notice No. 50 from FDA (CDRH).
FCC regulations
The BL-1300 Series complies with the following FCC EMI regulations.
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B digital devices
Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations

The BL-1300 Series comforms to the following IC EMI regulations.
ICES-003, Class B digital apparatus
CE Marking
The BL-1300 Series complies with the following essential requirements of the EU Directives.
EMC Directives (2004/108/EC)
Low-voltage Directives (2006/95/CE)
The following harmonized standards are applied to these products in order to confirm the
compliance.
Applicable standards (EMI) EN55011, Class A
EN55022, Class B
Applicable standards (EMS) EN61000-6-2
EN61000-6-1
4
Dedicated Communication Unit N-R2/R4/UB/L1
UL certification
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1, comply with the following UL/CSA standards and have
obtained the UL/C-UL certifications.
Applicable standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No. E207185, E167973
Be sure to observe the following installation and environment conditions.
Pollution degree 2
CAUTION Do not connect directly to the branch circuit. This product must be supplied power by
a suitable, approved isolated transformer or power supply not exceeding 200 VA
max.
FCC regulations
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1, comply with the following FCC EMI regulations.
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B digital devices
Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations

The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1 comply with the following IC EMI regulations.
ICES-003, Class B digital apparatus
CE Marking
The communication units N-R2/R4/UB/L1 comply with the following essential requirements of the EU
Directives.
EMC Directives (2004/108/EC)
The following harmonized standards are applied to this product in order to confirm the compliance.
EN55022, Class B (N-L1: Class A)
EN61000-6-1
* The length of the communication and power cables should be less than 30 m.
* To make the N-UB conform to the CE marking, attach the ferrite core to the
USB cable as shown in the following diagram.
Recommended types
Model: ZCAT2035-0930 (TDK)
OP-31973 (Keyence)
5
Software License Agreement
The KEYENCE Corporation (hereinafter referred to as "KEYENCE") requires that you accept the terms
and conditions of the following software license agreement (hereinafter referred to as the
"Agreement") before using the "BL-H13WE" Configuration Software for the BL-1300 Series (hereinafter
referred to as the "Software").
By using or reproducing any part of the Software, you signify that you accept all the terms and
conditions of this Agreement and the Agreement shall be concluded.
Item 1: License
1 KEYENCE shall give its assent to the non-exclusive license of the Software to you provided
that you abide by this Agreement.
2 You can install the Software in order to use the KEYENCE product which you purchased,
regardless of the number of licenses, as long as the Software is used for only one corporation.
Item 2: Limited reproduction

You can reproduce the Software only once for the purpose of keeping the backup copy of the
Software for yourself.
Item 3: Prohibitions
You are prohibited to do the following to the Software:
a. Alterations such as changing or adding a function of the Software partially or entirely.
The actions which are explicitly approved by KEYENCE such as installing the update
programs or additional functions provided by KEYENCE shall be excluded.
b. Any kinds of reverse engineering to analyze the Software, including reverse compilation and
reverse assembly.
c. Selling, transferring, redistributing, licensing, renting or leasing the Software to a third party.
Except where you have prior consent from KEYENCE.
Item 4: Copyright
The copyrights of the Software and its instruction manual and other related items are retained by
KEYENCE.
Item 5: Disclaimer
KEYENCE shall have no liability for any losses or damages to you or to any third parties that have
resulted from the operation of the Software.
Item 6: Support
Based on the Agreement, KEYENCE provides technical support such as answering questions
about the Software. There is, however, no guarantee that your purpose will be achieved by the
provided technical support.
Item 7: Termination of contract

1 This Agreement shall be terminated automatically when you stop the use of this Software by
discarding the Software and its copy.
2 If you violate any part of the terms of this Agreement, KEYENCE can unilaterally cancel your
Agreement. In such a case, you should immediately return the Software and its copy to
KEYENCE or discard them.
3 If your violation of the Agreement causes losses or damages upon KEYENCE, you will pay
indemnity for the losses or damages caused.
Item 8: Applicable laws

This Agreement shall be carried out under Japanese laws and regulations.
End of the Agreement
6
MEMO
7
Contents
Introduction
Safety Information for BL-1300 Series ..............................................................................1
Precautions on Proper Use ................................................................................................3
Overseas Regulations and Standards ..............................................................................4
Software License Agreement.............................................................................................6
Contents...............................................................................................................................8
Chapter 1 Overview
1-1 Package Contents List and the BL Series Lineup .........................................1-2

1-2 Part Names and Functions ..............................................................................1-6
BL-1300 Series ....................................................................................................................1-6
STABILITY LED display according to the BL-1300 Series operating status ...........1-7
Dedicated communication unit ...........................................................................................1-8
Field network controller .....................................................................................................1-11
1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow .........................................................1-12
System configuration.........................................................................................................1-12
Setup flow..........................................................................................................................1-14
Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring
2-1 Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit......2-2

Connection illustration .............................................................................................2-2
Pin layout of the head port ......................................................................................2-2
2-2 Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit ....................................................2-3
Connecting the DC power supply .......................................................................................2-3
Connecting the power supply terminal ...................................................................2-3
I/O terminal layout and wiring..............................................................................................2-4
I/O terminal layout ...................................................................................................2-4
Wiring the IN1 and IN2 terminals ............................................................................2-4
Wiring the OUT 1 through OUT 4 terminals.............................................................2-5
Wiring of an RS-232C port device (N-R2) ...........................................................................2-6
Pin layout of the RS-232C port ................................................................................2-6
Wiring the RS-232C cable .......................................................................................2-7
Wiring of an RS-422A/485 port device (N-R4) ....................................................................2-9
Terminal layout of the RS-422A connector ..............................................................2-9
Wiring the RS-422A cable .......................................................................................2-9
Terminal layout of RS-485......................................................................................2-10
Wiring the RS-485 cable........................................................................................2-10
Processing the communication cable ...................................................................2-11
RS-422A/RS-485 changeover switch and terminating resistance switch .............2-12
Wiring a USB port device (N-UB)......................................................................................2-13
Installing the USB driver........................................................................................2-13
Driver installation procedure .................................................................................2-14
Wiring of a LAN port device (N-L1) ...................................................................................2-18
8
2-3 Connecting the Network Controller ..............................................................2-19
Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the NX-50 Series network controller ...........................2-19
Connection illustration ...........................................................................................2-19
Pin layout of the head port ....................................................................................2-20
DC power supply...................................................................................................2-20
I/O terminal layout and connection ...................................................................................2-21
I/O terminal layout diagram ...................................................................................2-21
Wiring and circuit diagram of the NPN connectors...............................................2-22
Wiring and circuit diagram of the PNP connectors ...............................................2-22
Wiring a field network ........................................................................................................2-23
Processing the communication cable ...................................................................2-23
Connecting the communication cable ..................................................................2-24
Wiring of the CC-Link controller (NX-50CL) ..........................................................2-25
Wiring of the DeviceNet controller (NX-50DN) ......................................................2-26
Wiring of the RS-485 controller (NX-50RS)............................................................2-27
Wiring of the PC.................................................................................................................2-28
2-4 Connection without Using the Communication Unit...................................2-29
Pin layout and connection of BL-1300 Series connector ..................................................2-29
Pin layout ...............................................................................................................2-29
Connecting the power supply ...............................................................................2-30
Wiring IN1/IN2 input pins ......................................................................................2-30
Wiring OUT1/OUT2/OUT3/OUT4 output pins........................................................2-31
Wiring RS-232C .....................................................................................................2-31
OP-80616 wiring diagram .....................................................................................2-32
Chapter 3 Functions of the BL-1300 Series
3-1 Basic Operation ................................................................................................3-2

TEST button operation.........................................................................................................3-2
External input operation and output signals .......................................................................3-3
3-2 Preset/Verify Function......................................................................................3-5
Outline of the preset/verify function.....................................................................................3-5
Registering preset data ...........................................................................................3-5
Output terminal operation .......................................................................................3-6
Using "!" and "?" in the preset data..........................................................................3-6
3-3 Test Mode ..........................................................................................................3-7
Test mode of the BL-1300 Series ........................................................................................3-7
Test mode measurement result ...........................................................................................3-7
Test mode details ................................................................................................................3-8
Reading ratio test mode ..........................................................................................3-8
Tact measurement test mode ..................................................................................3-8
Bar code position test mode ...................................................................................3-9
Online test mode 1 ................................................................................................3-10
Online test mode 2 ................................................................................................3-11
3-4 Auto-trigger Mode...........................................................................................3-13
Outline of the Auto-trigger mode.......................................................................................3-13
Using the Auto-trigger mode.............................................................................................3-13
Setting the Auto-trigger mode operation...............................................................3-13
9
Setting the Auto-trigger sensitivity.........................................................................3-14
3-5 Multi-I/O Function ...........................................................................................3-15
Function and operation of the input terminals (IN1 and IN2) ............................................3-15
Functions assigned to the input terminals ............................................................3-15
Input terminal status and operation ......................................................................3-16
Function and operation of the output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4) ..........3-17
Functions assigned to the output terminals ..........................................................3-17
Output terminal operation .....................................................................................3-17
3-6 Scan Count Setting Function ........................................................................3-19
Outline of the scan count setting function.........................................................................3-19
Scan count setting range ......................................................................................3-19
3-7 Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) Addition Function...................3-20
Outline of the PMI function ................................................................................................3-20
PMI assessment criteria ........................................................................................3-20
Output data format ................................................................................................3-21
Setting the PMI preset values................................................................................3-21
3-8 Silent Mode......................................................................................................3-22
Outline of the silent mode..................................................................................................3-22
Setting procedure of silent mode ..........................................................................3-23
Data which is not sent in the silent mode..............................................................3-23
3-9 AGC/Parameter Bank Mode ...........................................................................3-25
AGC mode.........................................................................................................................3-25
Outline of the AGC (Auto Gain Control) mode ......................................................3-25
Parameter bank mode.......................................................................................................3-26
Outline of the parameter bank mode ....................................................................3-26
Setting the parameter bank...................................................................................3-26
Alternate function ..................................................................................................3-28
3-10 Bar Code Position Detection Function .........................................................3-29
Outline of the bar code position detection function ..........................................................3-29
3-11 Bar Code Composition Function...................................................................3-30
Bar code composition .......................................................................................................3-30
Setting the bar code composition function .......................................................................3-31
Requirement for the bar code composition...........................................................3-31
3-12 Quick Setup Bar Code ....................................................................................3-33
Quick setup bar code........................................................................................................3-33
Reading the quick setup bar code........................................................................3-34
Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation
4-1 Installing, starting, and quitting AutoID Navigator ........................................4-2

PC environment ...................................................................................................................4-2
Installation procedure..........................................................................................................4-3
Starting procedure ..............................................................................................................4-5
Quitting procedure ..............................................................................................................4-5
AutoID Navigator will close. ................................................................................................4-5
4-2 Screen Layout ...................................................................................................4-6
AutoID Navigator screen .....................................................................................................4-6
10
Menu icons ..............................................................................................................4-6
Project view .............................................................................................................4-7
4-3 Operating AutoID Navigator.............................................................................4-8
4-4 Setting procedure .............................................................................................4-9
Operation parameter setting ...............................................................................................4-9
Operation setting...............................................................................................................4-10
Barcode setting .................................................................................................................4-13
Range of the maximum and minimum number of digits .......................................4-15
Detailed setting for each barcode type.................................................................4-15
Port setting ........................................................................................................................4-20
Terminal setting .................................................................................................................4-22
Other settings ....................................................................................................................4-24
Advanced reading setting.................................................................................................4-25
Parameter bank setting .....................................................................................................4-27
4-5 Sending/receiving settings ............................................................................4-29
Connection update between AutoID Navigator and the BL-1300 Series..........................4-29
Sending settings to the BL-1300 Series ............................................................................4-30
Receiving settings from the BL-1300 Series .....................................................................4-31
4-6 Saving/reading a setting file ..........................................................................4-32
Saving a setting file ...........................................................................................................4-32
Reading a setting file.........................................................................................................4-33
4-7 Quick setup barcode ......................................................................................4-34
Printing a quick setup barcode .........................................................................................4-34
Reading a quick setup barcode........................................................................................4-35
4-8 Terminal and test mode..................................................................................4-36
Using the terminal .............................................................................................................4-36
Sending a command .............................................................................................4-39
Using Test Mode................................................................................................................4-41
4-9 Parameter Bank Tuning ..................................................................................4-43
Setting the parameter bank...............................................................................................4-43
"Manual" operation options....................................................................................4-43
"Auto" operation options and setup .......................................................................4-44
"Test" operation options and usage .......................................................................4-46
Chapter 5 Installation
5-1 Installing the BL-1300 Series...........................................................................5-2

Considerations before installing the BL-1300 Series ..........................................................5-2
Installing the BL-1300 Series...............................................................................................5-4
Adjusting the mounting angle .................................................................................5-4
Adjusting the reading distance ...............................................................................5-4
Mounting the BL-1300 Series ..................................................................................5-5
5-2 Installing the dedicated communication unit.................................................5-8
Precautions..........................................................................................................................5-8
Installing the N-R2/R4/UB/L1...............................................................................................5-9
11
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit to the DIN rail..................................5-9
Removing the Dedicated Communication Unit from the DIN rail..........................5-10
5-3 Installing the Network Controller ..................................................................5-11
Precautions........................................................................................................................5-11
Installation/removal procedure ..........................................................................................5-12
Mounting the NX-50 to the DIN rail........................................................................5-12
Removing the NX-50 from the DIN rail ..................................................................5-12
Chapter 6 Operation of the BL-1300 Series
6-1 Read Operation .................................................................................................6-2

Signal type...........................................................................................................................6-2
Level signal trigger..................................................................................................6-2
One-shot signal trigger............................................................................................6-4
Auto-trigger .............................................................................................................6-5
Data transmission timing .....................................................................................................6-6
Sending data after a bar code is read ....................................................................6-6
Sending data after the trigger input turns off ..........................................................6-6
6-2 Read Modes.......................................................................................................6-8
Single label read mode .......................................................................................................6-8
Multi-label read mode .........................................................................................................6-8
Multi-label read mode 1 ..........................................................................................6-9
Multi-label read mode 2 ........................................................................................6-10
Multi-label read mode 3 ........................................................................................6-11
6-3 Custom Reading Setting ................................................................................6-13
Outline of the custom reading setting ...............................................................................6-13
Items of the custom reading setting......................................................................6-13
Read error detection timer ....................................................................................6-16
Chapter 7 Serial Communication
7-1 Serial Communication Outline ........................................................................7-2

Type of serial communication..............................................................................................7-2
Serial communication setup ................................................................................................7-2
7-2 Details of data communication........................................................................7-3
Communication protocol .....................................................................................................7-3
No handshaking ......................................................................................................7-3
PASS/RTRY ..............................................................................................................7-3
ACK/NAK.................................................................................................................7-4
RTS/CTS ..................................................................................................................7-4
Send buffer capacity ...........................................................................................................7-5
Communication format ........................................................................................................7-5
Read error code ..................................................................................................................7-5
12
Adding various data ............................................................................................................7-6
Details of each additional data................................................................................7-6
7-3 Details of command communication ............................................................7-11
Type of command communication ....................................................................................7-11
Procedure of command communication ...........................................................................7-11
Command communication format .....................................................................................7-11
Direct control command ....................................................................................................7-13
Read operation control..........................................................................................7-13
Preset data registration .........................................................................................7-13
Test mode control ..................................................................................................7-13
I/O terminal control ................................................................................................7-14
Resetting the BL-1300 Series................................................................................7-15
Forced laser OFF/Resetting laser OFF..................................................................7-15
Motor control .........................................................................................................7-15
Changing the laser scanning width.......................................................................7-16
Clearing the send buffer........................................................................................7-17
Starts/Finishes auto-trigger setting........................................................................7-17
Reading history check ..........................................................................................7-17
Shifting in or out of the setting mode.....................................................................7-17
Setting command ..............................................................................................................7-18
Setting command communication procedure .......................................................7-18
Setting command details.......................................................................................7-19
Chapter 8 PLC Link
8-1 Outline of the PLC Link ....................................................................................8-2

Outline of the PLC link .........................................................................................................8-2
List of applicable PLC models ............................................................................................8-2
Internal devices used for the PLC link ................................................................................8-3
8-2 Setting Procedure .............................................................................................8-4
Setting the BL-1300 Series..................................................................................................8-4
KV Series settings ...............................................................................................................8-5
MELSEC Series settings......................................................................................................8-5
SYSMAC Series settings .....................................................................................................8-6
8-3 Device Assignment...........................................................................................8-7
Tables of DM assignment ....................................................................................................8-7
Detailed description of DM assignment ..............................................................................8-9
Data write starting address (X+00 to X+03)............................................................8-9
Reading trigger area (X+04 to X+06)....................................................................8-10
Data write flag area (A+00) ...................................................................................8-12
Additional data area (A+01 to A+04) ....................................................................8-15
Data write area (A+05 to A+69) ............................................................................8-15
DM data storage mode .........................................................................................8-16
8-4 Sample Program .............................................................................................8-18
8-5 PLC Link Error ................................................................................................8-20
13
Chapter 9 Field Network Communication
9-1 Control Using CC-Link .....................................................................................9-2

Building a system using CC-Link ........................................................................................9-2
Setting the NX-50CL............................................................................................................9-3
CC-Link setting parameters ....................................................................................9-3
CC-Link operation and memory configuration ....................................................................9-4
Memory configuration .............................................................................................9-4
Setting and programming ...................................................................................................9-8
Setting the communication parameters ..................................................................9-8
Setting the data size................................................................................................9-8
Creating a ladder program....................................................................................9-11
9-2 Control using DeviceNet ................................................................................9-14
Building a system using DeviceNet ..................................................................................9-14
Setting the NX-50DN .........................................................................................................9-15
DeviceNet setting parameters...............................................................................9-15
DeviceNet operation and memory configuration ..............................................................9-16
Memory configuration ...........................................................................................9-16
Setting and programming .................................................................................................9-20
Setting the communication parameters ................................................................9-20
Setting the data size..............................................................................................9-21
Creating a ladder program....................................................................................9-24
9-3 Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series ...................................................9-27
List of the control commands of the BL-1300 Series ........................................................9-27
Chapter 10 Ethernet Communication
10-1 Overview of the N-L1 ......................................................................................10-2

Basic specifications ..........................................................................................................10-2
Operation of the N-L1........................................................................................................10-3
Establishing connection ........................................................................................10-3
Data transmission timing .......................................................................................10-3
Keep Alive/Idle function ........................................................................................10-4
10-2 Setting the N-L1 ..............................................................................................10-6
Setting procedure..............................................................................................................10-6
Preparation ............................................................................................................10-6
Setting the N-L1.....................................................................................................10-7
Checking the connection of the N-L1....................................................................10-9
Setting command list.......................................................................................................10-10
System configuration using the N-L1 ..................................................................10-12
10-3 Precautions for using the N-L1 ...................................................................10-15
Precautions for the BL-1300 Series .....................................................................10-15
Precautions for the N-L1......................................................................................10-15
10-4 Troubleshooting of the N-L1 ........................................................................10-16
14
Appendix
1 BL-1300 Series Specifications....................................................................... A-2

Specifications ..................................................................................................................... A-2
Reading range characteristics (Typical) ............................................................................ A-4
Angular characteristics (Typical) ....................................................................................... A-8
2 N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications ....................................................................... A-9
3 NX-50 Series Specifications ........................................................................ A-10
4 Dimensions diagram .................................................................................... A-12
5 General Troubleshooting ............................................................................. A-17
Bar codes cannot be read. ................................................................................. A-17
Reading ratio test mode is not 100%. ................................................................. A-18
The setting data cannot be sent/received using AutoID Navigator. ................... A-18
Communication using the PLC link, field network, or Ethernet fails. ................... A-18
6 CODE93 Specifications ................................................................................ A-19
7 CODE128 Specifications .............................................................................. A-20
8 ITF/2of5/COOP2of5 Specifications.............................................................. A-21
Definition of 2of5 .................................................................................................. A-21
9 Concept of Bar Code Position ..................................................................... A-23
Bar code position range ...................................................................................... A-23
Right and left end positions of a bar code .......................................................... A-23
Cautions on using the bar code position data .................................................... A-24
10 Checksum Calculation Method ................................................................... A-25
Checksum calculation position ........................................................................... A-25
Checksum calculation method ............................................................................ A-25
11 ASCII Code Table .......................................................................................... A-27
12 Setup Parameter List .................................................................................... A-28
13 Default Setting List ....................................................................................... A-32
15
16
1
Overview
This chapter describes basic information required before the BL-1300 Series
is used, including the package contents and product overview.
1-1 Package Contents List and the BL Series Lineup...1-2

1-2 Part Names and Functions ......................................1-6
1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow ..................1-12
1-1
1-1 Package Contents List and the BL Series Lineup
1 The packages of the BL-1300 Series, dedicated communication unit, and AutoID system integration/
configuration software contain the following components. Be sure to check that you have all the listed
Overview
contents before use.
Laser bar code reader

BL-1300 Series bar code reader: 1
BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA Insulating spacer: 4
1370/1371
Washer: 4
Mounting screw (M3): 2
Mounting bracket Instruction manual

96M11253 The "BL-1300 Series Laser Barcode Reader" uses a visible laser light
BL-1350HA/1351HA
source.
BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/ Laser Bar Code Reader

BL-1300 Series
Model
Wavelength
Output
Pulse width
FDA (CDRH)
Laser Class Part 1040.10
IEC 60825-1
BL-1300, 1301, 1300HA, 1301HA, 1350HA, 1351HA, 1370, 1371
660 nm
85 Ps
112 Ps
Instruction Manual
1301HA/1370/1371
Follow the instructions mentioned in this manual.
Otherwise, injury to the human body (eyes and skin)
may result.
Precautions on class 2 laser products
Do not stare into the beam.
Do not direct the beam at other people or into areas
where other people unconnected with the laser work
might be present.
Be careful of the path of the laser beam.
WARNING If there is a danger that the operator may be
exposed to the laser beam reflected by specular or
Mounting bracket A and B: 1 each Mounting bracket: 1

diffuse reflection, block the beam by installing an
enclosure with the appropriate reflectance.
Install the products so that the path of the laser beam
is not as the same height as that of human eye.
Do not disassemble this product. Laser emission
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or from this product is not automatically stopped when
DANGER serious injury. it is disassembled.
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury. The BL-1300 Series barcode readers are equipped with the following
safety measures based on IEC 60825-1.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to product Laser radiation emission warning LED (LASER LED)
CAUTION damage (product malfunction, etc.). During laser emission, the LASER ON LED illuminates. The LED ON
status can be clearly visible through protective eyewear; specifically
Provides additional information on proper operation.
designed for the wavelength of 660nm.
Note
Laser forced OFF command

Indicates useful information or information that aids Sending the laser forced OFF command to the BL-1300 can inhibit
TIPS
understanding of text descriptions.
emission of laser beams. When working near the laser transmitter, be
sure to use the laser forced OFF command to avoid looking into the
laser beams.
* When this command is selected, the bottom STABILITY LED flashes.
Safety information for BL-1500 Series
IEC warning/explanatory label locations
General precautions
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to avoid any BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA
damage in the event a problem occurs. 1301HA/1370/1371
If the BL-1300 is modified or used in any way other than described in
the specifications, its function and performance cannot be guaranteed.
When the BL-1300 is used in combination with other instruments, the
function and performance may be effected by operating conditions and
the surrounding environment.
It is prohibited to use or copy all or any part of this manual without prior
approval.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice.
Notice
When this product is used under the circumstances and operating
environments described below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings,
take adequate measures to ensure safety such as fail-safe installations
and consult a KEYENCE sales representative.
For use under circumstances or environments which are not described
in the manual
For use with nuclear power control, railway, aircraft, vehicles, Use the suitable IEC warning/explanatory label included in the
incinerators, medical equipment, entertainment equipment, safety package of this product according to the countries and/or regions
where this product is used.
devices etc. In this case, it can be affixed on the IEC warning/explanatory label,
For use in applications where death or serious property damage is which has already been affixed to this product.
possible and extensive safety precautions are required.
Safety precautions on laser product
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

CAUTION procedures other than those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.
Laser warning seal set: 1

BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA
1301HA/1370/1371
Model Scanning direction Scan method Reading bar width Focal distance
BL-1300 Single
0.125 mm min. 120 mm
BL-1301 Raster
BL-1300HA Single
Front 0.081 mm min. 90 mm
BL-1301HA Raster
BL-1370 Single
0.15 mm min. 230 mm
BL-1371 Raster
BL-1350HA Single
Side 0.08 mm min. 65 mm
BL-1351HA Raster
1-2
Dedicated communication unit 1

N-R2 N-R4
Overview
Connector for RS-422A/485
RS-422A terminal layout label
N-UB N-L1 Instruction manual

(supplied for each unit)
96M00269 Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage

lines and power lines. Otherwise, generated noise may
cause product failure or malfunctions.
The N-R4 is a precision instrument. If the unit is
CAUTION dropped or shock is applied, it may be damaged. Use
Dedicated Communication Unit caution when unpacking, carrying, and mounting.
Be sure to observe all warnings, cautions, and
RS-422A/485 Output Type precautions specified in the manual.
N-R4
Do not install the N-R4 in the following locations:
Locations subject to direct sunlight
Locations where the surrounding air temperature is outside the
range of 0 to +50C or locations subject to condensation as the
Instruction Manual result of severe changes in temperature
Locations where the ambient humidity is outside the range of 35
to 85%RH.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
Locations subject to dust, salts, iron dust, or oil smoke
Locations subject to shock or vibration
Locations subject to exposure of water, oil, or chemicals
Locations where strong magnetic or electric fields are generated
Foreign Regulations and Standards

Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or
DANGER serious injury. UL certification
The N-R4 complies with the following UL/CSA standards and has
obtained the UL/C-UL certification.
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury. Applicable standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No. E207185, E167973
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to product UL category NRAQ/NRAQ7, NWGQ2/NWGQ8
CAUTION damage (product malfunction, etc.). Be sure to observe the following installation and environment conditions.
Pollution degree 2
Note Provides additional information on proper operation. Overvoltage category I
Caution - Do not connect directly to the branch circuit. This product must
Indicates useful information or information that aids be supplied power by a suitable, approved isolated transformer or power
TIPS
understanding of text descriptions. supply not exceeding 200 VA max.
FCC regulations
The N-R4 complies with the following FCC EMI regulations.
For Safely Using the Product
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B digital device
General precautions Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations
At startup and during operation, be sure to check that the The N-R4 complies with the following IC EMI regulations.
functions and performance of the N-R4 is operating properly. ICES-003, Class B digital apparatus
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to
avoid any damage in the event a problem occurs. CE marking
If the N-R4 is modified or used in any way other than described in The N-R4 complies with the following essential requirements of the EU
the specifications, its function and performance cannot be Directive.
guaranteed. EMC Directive (2004/108/EC)
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments, the
The following harmonized standards are applied to this product in order
function and performance may be effected by operating conditions
to confirm the compliance.
and the surrounding environment.
Do not use the N-R4 for the purpose of protecting the human
EN55022, Class B
body.
The information contained in this manual is subject to change
EN61000-6-1
without notice.
* The length of the communication and power cables should be less than 30 m.
Notice
When this product is used under the circumstances and operating
environments described below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings,
Package Contents List
take adequate measures to ensure safety such as fail-safe installations
and consult a KEYENCE sales representative. Main unit Instruction manual
For use under circumstances or environments which are not
96M00275 Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage
described in the manual N-R4

Locations where the ambient temperature is outside the range of
0 to +50C or locations subject to condensation as the result of
Instruction Manual severe changes in temperature
to 85%RH.
For use with nuclear power control, railway, aircraft, vehicles,


Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or UL approval
DANGER serious injury.
The N-R4 conforms to the following UL/CSA standards and has obtained
incinerators, medical equipment, entertainment equipment, safety

the UL/C-UL approval.
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury. Conforming standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No. E207185, E167973
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to product
CAUTION damage (product malfunction, etc.). When using the N-R4 as a UL approved product, be sure to observe the
following installation and environment conditions.
Provides additional information on proper operation. Pollution degree 2
Note
devices etc.
Indicates useful information or information that aids FCC regulations
TIPS
understanding of text descriptions. The N-R4 conforms to the following FCC EMI regulations.
Conforming regulations FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B
digital equipment
For Safely Using the Product Canada IC (Industry Canada regulations)
The N-R4 conforms to the following IC EMI regulations.
General precautions
Conforming regulations ICES-003, Class B Digital equipment
At startup and during operation, be sure to check that the
functions and performance of the N-R4 is operating properly. CE marking
For use in applications where death or serious property damage is

We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to The N-R4 conforms to the following essential requirements of the EU
avoid any damage in the event a problem occurs. directive.
If the N-R4 is used in any way other than described in the EMC directive (2004/108/EC)
specifications or if modified, its functions and performance cannot
be guaranteed. By checking the conformity to the following EN standards, the conformity
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments, to the essential requirements of the EMC directive is checked and the CE
functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the marking is indicated.
operating conditions and the surrounding environment. Conforming standards (EMI) EN55011, Class A
Do not use the N-R4 for the purpose of protecting the human EN55022, Class B
possible and extensive safety precautions are required.

body. Conforming standards (EMS) EN61000-6-2
The information contained in this manual is subject to change EN61000-6-1
without notice. * The length of the communication and power cables should be less than 30 m.
Notice
When the product is used under the circumstances or environment Package Contents List
below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and functions, take
countermeasures for safety precautions such as fail-safe installations Main unit Instruction manual
and consult a KEYENCE sales representative. 96M00275 Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage

N-R4
Instruction Manual severe changes in temperature
described in the manual

to 85%RH.

DANGER
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or UL approval
serious injury.
The N-R4 conforms to the following UL/CSA standards and has obtained
the UL/C-UL approval.
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury. Conforming standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No. E207185, E167973
For properly using the product

CAUTION

damage (product malfunction, etc.). When using the N-R4 as a UL approved product, be sure to observe the
following installation and environment conditions.
Note Provides additional information on proper operation. Pollution degree 2
Indicates useful information or information that aids FCC regulations

TIPS
understanding of text descriptions. The N-R4 conforms to the following FCC EMI regulations.
Conforming regulations FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B
digital equipment
devices etc.
For Safely Using the Product Canada IC (Industry Canada regulations)
General precautions The N-R4 conforms to the following IC EMI regulations.
At startup and during operation, be sure to check that the
Conforming regulations ICES-003, Class B Digital equipment
functions and performance of the N-R4 is operating properly. CE marking
We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to The N-R4 conforms to the following essential requirements of the EU
avoid any damage in the event a problem occurs. directive.
If the N-R4 is used in any way other than described in the EMC directive (2004/108/EC)
specifications or if modified, its functions and performance cannot
For use for applications where death or serious property damage

be guaranteed. By checking the conformity to the following EN standards, the conformity
When the N-R4 is used in combination with other instruments, to the essential requirements of the EMC directive is checked and the CE
functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the marking is indicated.
operating conditions and the surrounding environment. Conforming standards (EMI) EN55011, Class A
Do not use the N-R4 for the purpose of protecting the human EN55022, Class B
body. Conforming standards (EMS) EN61000-6-2
The information contained in this manual is subject to change EN61000-6-1
without notice. * The length of the communication and power cables should be less than 30 m.
Notice
is possible and extensive safety precautions are required

When the product is used under the circumstances or environment Package Contents List
below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and functions, take
countermeasures for safety precautions such as fail-safe installations Main unit Instruction manual
and consult a KEYENCE sales representative.
For use under circumstances or environments which are not Dedicated Communication Unit
96M00266
RS-232C Output Type

CAUTION
Locate the cables as far as possible from

lines and power lines. Otherwise,
dropped or shock is applied, it may beged.

generated noise may
gh-volta
dama
hi ge

N-R2
Instruction Manual
Be sure to observe all warnin
caution when unpackin
precautions specified in the manual.

g, carrying, and mountin
gs, cautions, and
g.
Use

Do not install theN-R2 in the follo


wing locations:
DANGER
severe changes in temperatu re
to 85%RH.

WARNING
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to death or
serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions may lead to injury.

The N-R2 conforms to the follo
Note
CAUTION
damage (product malfunction, etc.).
the UL/C-UL appro
Conforming standards UL508, UL60950-1
UL File No.
UL category
UL approval
Whenusing theN-R2 as a UL appro

following installation and en
val.
E2071 85, E167973

NRAQ/NRAQ7, NWGQ2/NWGQ8
wing UL/CSA standards and hasbtained
o
devices etc. At startup and during operation,be sure to check that the
For Safely Usin g the Product
TIPS
Provides additional information on proper operation.
Indicatesuseful information or information that aids

understanding of text descriptions.
Pollution degree 2
vironment conditions.
ved product, be sure to observe the

FCC re gulations

wing FCC EMI reg ulations.

We recommend that you take substantial safety measures to
If the N-L1 is used in any way other than descri bed in the
functions and performance of theN-L1 is operating properly.
When the N-L1 is used in combination with other instruments,

avoid any damage in the event a problem occurs.
General precautions
Conforming regulations
Conforming regulations
Canada IC (Industry Canada re gulations)
FCC Part 15 Subpart B, Class B
digital equipment
Do not use the N-L1 for the purpose of protecting the uman
specifications or if modified, its functions and performance can not
The information contained in this manual is subject to change

be guaranteed.
functions and performance may be degraded, depending on the

operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
directive.
without notice.
h body.
EMC directive (2004/108/EC)
By checking the conformity to the follo
CE markin g
is possible and extensive safety precautions are required

to the essential re
When the product isused under the circumstances or environment

marking is indicated.
wing essential requirements of the EU
wing IC EMI regulations.
ICES-003, Class B Digital equipment
below, adhere to the limitations of the ratings and

Conforming standards (EMI)
countermeasures for safety preca

and consult a KEYENCE sales representati
Conforming standards (EMS)
quirements of the EMC directi
EN55022, Class B
wing EN standards, the conformity

Notice
utions such as fail-safe installations

ve.
unctions,
f take
* The length of the comm
EN61000-6-1
EN55011, Class A
EN61000-6-2
ve is checked and the CE


devices etc.
Mainunit
Packa ge Contents List
unication and po
wer cables should be less than 30 m.

is possible and extensiv e safety precautions are required
Instruction man
For properly usin g the product

Dedicated
RS-232C
N-R2
Instruction
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
serious
Failure
Failure
dama
Failure to
utp
ge (product
utunication
TypeOComm
96M00266
ual
injury.
to
to
Manual
Locations
Locations
Locations
Locations
Dow
Locations
se
to
0to
The
the
Conforming
UL
Forei
v5
8e%
CAUTION
Unit
UL
Nfollow
follow
follow
-R2
Rub
C
+50
gnub
w
w
ub
N
Be
The
oN
Locate
hject
h
h
re
ject
N-R2
ject
precautions
cause
dropped
caution
lines
guere
va.UL/C-UL
H.
not
ere
ere
ust,
Re
ior
b
b
iu
ub
category
urlations
File
vent
uent
ject
l.approval
eviu
re
nlight
w
changes
nes.
w
ing
R
mbor
be
ing
raation
w
conforms
,5
8
g ,sure
R
sle
u
urto
E2071
to
to
AQ/
locations
utside
sg
g
UL60950-1
salts,
ter,
in
NW
idity
e
of
u
g
install
carryin
t,
N-R2
strong
the
the
tside
,,and
enerated
GQ2/
AQ7,
hto
temperat
these
these
these
and
UL/CSA
g
locations:
g
hproduct
gases
is
u
ecautions,
corrosi
d
shock
expos
direct
flamma
or
g
lt sof
the
. d.when
btained
ge
-volta
thepower
Otherwise,
soil,
s
am
am
o the
condensation
to
isthe
oil
and
or
iron
Use
follo
standards
is shock
mountin
appro
the
in range
o
or
magnetic
observe
cables
smoke
instructions
instructions
instructions
ssrange of as the res
to standards
orchemicals
a noise
specified
temperat
etc.). UL50
Standards
d
precision
unpackin
the follo and

failure
and
li asmay
isall
of 35
or electric
applied,
far
orinstrument.
warnin
in
may lead
mayhas
may
as
malfunctions.
the manual.
possible from hi
lead
lead
it may If
fields
o to
toare
to product
death
bethe
injury.
generated
unit is
dama
or
CAUTION
Be sure that all screws are
Use crimp contacts of the specified size for
The N-L1 uses a 24 VDC power supply.
Do not use the N-L1 in anenvironment subject to
flammable, explosive, or corrosive
W
At
Do not disassemble or modify the N-L1. This may cause

supply outside this ge
cause product failure.
ghtened
ti
gases.
securely. W
W
If
Do
The
hn
For
Note
TIPS
General
specifications
b
Notice
fuo
v
a
fuh
operating
w
e
n
nuausN
iu
eN
tho
t notice.
en
upctions
-L1
Provides
Indicates
n
u
en
id
-the
ctions
ct
sg
u
ranteed.
N
urstart
recommend
e
L1
-L1
u
used
derstanding
gthe
su
and
ing
l ef
uw
not
etake
any
v
a
ed
Safely
u
the
rinformation
information
b
ithe
ub
uis
bstantial
n
e-urL1
N
e
unation
pose
ynt
nro
blem
is
uafor
win
ictions
esoperation,
th
idegraded,
ding
v
ub
rother
u
lject
bin
ronment.
es.
du
Product
aand
u
and
rdamage
m
uis
to
man
es
dany
bothe
other
sispro
precautions
com
occ
indirecti
ents,
conditions
dy.
sof
check
en
to
operating
Usin
The
Conforming
The
EMC
By
to
marking
Conforming
Conforming
W
The
Conforming
additional
follo
to
hen
Ow
Poll
FCC
Canada
N
CE
N
N
performance
performance
iu
e
v
-safety
-ve
-R2
uvtsng
than
the
and
oion
protecting
R2
R2
g
pchange
ring
ulations
.vg
ethe
qu
-malfunction,
or
ulthat
ulations
ltage
irements
instr
R2
checking
ations
ofviN
8/(2004/10
w
w
w
markin
installation
idigital
iEC)
ing
ronment
or
contained
ng
ng
conforms
conforms
conforms
vN
E
E
ifin
w
e
N
N
degree
performance
that
ing
qu
5
55022,
6b
re
depending
text
the
directi
descri
ipment
g
N
essential
u,d
u
ct,
ulations.
qu
as
v5011,
ub
modified,
be
irements
estandards,
upart
lations.
information
yo
uE167973
the
lations)
meas
NW
re
category
IC
essential
FCC
GQ
prod
b
is
s8veaer
qu
and
IC
ipment
Eindicated.
the
properly.
ICES-003,
FCC
descriptions.
toinformation
eB,
EMI
checked
the
ereg
UL
the
(Industry
of
standards
reg
the
standards
o2conditions.
Class
EMI
the
ofto
may
Class
the
toof
to
inre
appro
Part
reg
and
hconformity
the
its
on
sthis
I that
the Class
the
the
rethe
reg15
the
EMC
cannot
Aand
B
fthe
en aids
Bfollo
follo
follo
conformity
man
Canada
EU
(EMI)
(EMS)
S
directi
on proper operation.
theto
B Digital
Ethe
CE
E
re e
follo
product failure.
ranor an AC power supply may
gaUsin
power
g. wirin
For
For
b
co
and
For
e
de
is
u
descri
incinerators,
For
viu
w
CAUTION
,lo
u
ssbed
u
sces
blepossi
uru
termeas
ltu
n
wie
product
supply
adhere
eth
cause
D
Dge
flammable,
B
U
T
ucder
usuned
es
NC
ua
muqu
he
ve
a
lear
og
othe
seesure
w
w
here
and
er
ipment,
for
cons
the
in
is
properly
u
EnlKEYE
tder
stances
etc.
um
ions
vu
ifor
safety
not
not
utions
cv
e
w
hN-L1
g
sales
ronments
circ
acontrol,
crimp
the
usapplications
hw
atened
g
u
or
nstances
.hy,
qu
qu
iprod
v
vpo
ipment,
ired
ehicles,
product
extensi
gproduct
ses.
ronment
ich
ctions,
as
property
the
safety
. outside
g
a
death
1disassemble
to
use
aircraft,
an
sman
that
power
failure.failure.
are
*The
fail-safe
are
entertainment
the
Packa
Main
preca
uses
representati
circunpreca
g
unmedical
AC
eitrail
or
securely.
contacts
usin
the
explosive,
or
re
take
limitations
Contents
allpower
safety
or
not
enuction
e61000-6-1
ication
w length
damage
serio
len
N-L1
r1000-6-2
es
ulbe
Instr
dca
uale man
less
sho and
installations
inor
of
List
than
e
the
of
an
po
corrosive
the
environment
comm
30ratings
m. and f
subject to
E N-R2-IM
screws
athis
EN -R2-IM
24 VDC ofsupply
ran theare
or modify powertimay
specified
the
size for wiri n
supply.
N-L1.Usin
This may cause

Do not use the N-R4 in an environment subject to
1
flammable, explosive, or corrosive gases.

Connector for the RS-422A/485 Seal for the connectors
(used when wiring RS-422A)
Be sure that all screws are tightened securely.
Use crimp contacts of the specified size for wiring.
CAUTION The N-R4 uses a 24 VDC power supply. Using a power
supply outside this range or an AC power supply may
For 422 connector
Do not disassemble or modify the N-R4. This may cause

product failure.
1 E N-R4-IM

Connector for the RS-422A/485 Seal for the connectors
flammable, explosive, or corrosive gases.
(used when wiring RS-422A)
Be sure that all screws are tightened securely.
For 422 connector
product failure.
1 E N-R4-IM

flammable, explosive, or corrosive gases. Connector for the RS-422A/485 Label for the connectors
Be sure that all screws are tightened securely. (used when wiring RS-422A)
cause product failure. For 422 connector
product failure.
1 E N-R4-IM
Model Supply voltage Communication interface

N-R2 RS-232C
N-R4 RS-422A/485 (Selectable with DIP switches)
24 VDC
N-UB USB connection
N-L1 Ethernet connection
1-3
1 Network controller NX-50 Series

NX-50RS (RS-485 controller)
Overview
NX-50RS main unit: 1 Connector for RS-485: 1 Instruction manual: 1
Instruction
Manual
NX-50CL (CC-Link controller)

NX-50CL main unit: 1 CC-Link connector: 1 Instruction manual: 1
Instruction
Manual
NX-50DN (DeviceNet controller)

NX-50DN main unit: 1 DeviceNet connector: 1 Instruction manual: 1
Instruction
Manual
Configuration software and User's manual (BL-H13WE)

AutoID system integration/
configuration software AutoID Navigator
DVD-ROM: 1
1-4
Other options and peripheral devices 1

N-410: RS-485 master unit
Overview
Used as a master unit when RS-485 communication is used.
Extension cables
NX-C03R: 3 m extension cable
Used to extend the cable between the BL-1300 Series and
dedicated communication unit/network controller.
DV-90 Series: AutoID data controller
OP-80616: Conversion cable

Used to connect the BL-1300 Series and DV-90 Series.
(Cable length: 0.2 m)
1-5
1-2 Part Names and Functions
1 This section describes the part names and functions of the BL-1300 Series, dedicated
communication unit, and network controller.
Overview
BL-1300 Series
6. Transmitter/receiver 6. Transmitter/receiver
8. Cable 8. Cable
7. Connector 7. Connector
1. LASER LED
4. STABILITY LEDs 2. OK/NG/ERR LED
5. TEST Button 3. TIMING LED
Number Name Function

1 LASER LED Lit when laser beams are emitted.
When OK output is ON: The green LED light turns on.
2 OK/NG/ERR LED When NG output is ON: The orange LED light turns on.
When ERR output is ON: The red LED light turns on.
3 TIMING LED Lit when trigger input is ON.
4 STABILITY LED Displays the reading stability and the BL-1300 operating status.
This switch is used to perform the following operations.
If pressed once shortly, the barcode is read once.
Starting and canceling the test mode
5 TEST Button Start reading of batch set bar codes
Registering preset data
Canceling PLC link errors
Fixing the communication setting to the initial value when setting
transmission and reception
6 Transmitter/receiver Receives the reflected laser beam to read barcodes.
7 Connector Used to connect to the communication unit.
8 Cable Cable length is 2 m.
1-6
STABILITY LED display according to the BL-1300 Series operating 1

status
Overview
The STABILITY LED of the BL-1300 lights as
follows to indicate the operating status of the LED 5
BL-1300 Series. LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
Display in run mode/setting mode

Operating status STABILITY LED
At power-on LEDs 1 to 5 turn on sequentially.
Forced laser off LED 1 flashes.
LED 2 flashes.
When this occurs, there may be a problem with the BL-
Unit error
1300 Series. Contact your nearest KEYENCE office or
distributor.
Forced motor stop LED 3 flashes.
Run mode
Send buffer overflow LED 4 flashes.
PLC link error LED 5 flashes.
Code No. display LEDs corresponding to the No. for which reading was
Parameter bank display performed turn on.
Factory-configured
One of LEDs 1, 3, and 5 flashes.
communication setting
Reading the batch set bar code
All LEDs 1 to 5 flash.
starts.
Setting mode
Batch set bar code is being
Shows the progress of the batch set bar code reading.
read.
Code No./parameter bank No. display

The code No. and parameter bank No. are expressed with the following combination of lighting LEDs.
No.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LED
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3
LED 2
LED 1
1-7
1 Test mode display

When the test mode of the BL-1300 is used, the STABILITY LED displays the results as follows:
Overview
Test mode
STB LED
Lighting LED Tact
display Reading ratio Bar code position
measurement
5 LEDs 81 to 100% 100 or more
The width of the laser beam field is

4 LEDs 61 to 80% 50 or more divided into 9999 equal sections to
indicate the range from the start to stop
characters of barcode being read (One
3 LEDs 41 to 60% 10 or more LED relates to 2000 sections of the laser
beam field.).
2 LEDs 21 to 40% 5 or more LED 5: 8001 to 9999

LED 4: 6001 to 8000
LED 3: 4001 to 6000
1 LED 1 to 20% 1 or more LED 2: 2001 to 4000
LED 1: 0000 to 2000
0%
None Read error
(Read error)
Dedicated communication unit
N-R2
1. Head port
2. Power LED
3. Communication status LED
4. RS-232C port
5. I/O status LED
6. I/O terminals
7. Power terminal
8. DIN rail mounting tab

1 Head port Used to connect the head.
2 Power LED Lights when the power is ON.
3 Communication status LED Monitors the status of communication with the head.
4 RS-232C port Used to connect to the host (personal computer, PLC).
5 I/O status LED Monitors the ON/OFF status of the I/O terminals.
6 I/O terminals Used to connect I/O signal lines of control units.
7 Power terminal Terminal for 24 V DC power supply input.
8 DIN rail mounting tab Used to secure the N-R2 to a DIN rail.
1-8
N-R4 1
Overview
1. Head port
9. RS-422A/485
changeover switch 2. Power LED
4. RS-422A/485 connector
5. I/O status LED
6. I/O terminals
10. Terminating
resistance switch
7. Power terminal

4 RS-422A/485 connector Used to connect to the host (personal computer, PLC).
8 DIN rail mounting tab Used to secure the N-R4 to a DIN rail.
RS-422A/485 changeover
9 Used to switch between RS-422A and 485 communications.
switch
10 Terminating resistance switch Used to switch between ON and OFF for terminating resistance.
States of RS-422A/485 changeover switch and terminating resistance switch

RS-422A RS-485 Terminating
Number
communication mode communication mode resistance ON
1 Left Right -
2 Left Right -
3 - - Right
* Factory settings are by default RS-485 communication and the terminating resistance set to the
OFF position.
1-9
1 N-UB
Overview
1. Head port
2. Power LED
4. USB port
5. I/O status LED
6. I/O terminals
7. Power terminal

4 USB port Used to connect to a personal computer.
8 DIN rail mounting tab Used to secure the N-UB to a DIN rail.
N-L1
1. Head port
2. Power LED
11. RESET/RUN switch
4. LINK LED
5. 100/10 LED
6. Ethernet connection port
7. I/O status LED
8. I/O terminals
9. Power terminal

4 LINK LED Lights when communication with an Ethernet unit is established.
Lights when there is 100 Mbps communication. Goes off when
5 100/10 LED
there is 10 Mbps communication.
6 Ethernet connection port Used to connect to an Ethernet unit.
10 DIN rail mounting tab Used to secure the N-L1 to a DIN rail.
11 RESET/RUN switch Used to switch the setting/run mode.
1-10
Field network controller 1
Overview
NX-50 Series
1. Terminating 6. Display
resistance switch
7. Network
2. RS-232C connector communication
status LEDs*
8. Head
3. Field network communication
connectors status LEDs
9. Operation switches
4. Power 10. Head connector

supply terminals
11. DIN rail mounting

5. I/O terminals tab
* The number and type of the LEDs are different depending on the model.
No. Name Description

Used to turn on/off the termination resistor (TERMINATOR).
Terminating
1 Set this switch to ON when the NX-50 Series is connected at the end
resistance switch
of the trunk line. Otherwise, set this switch to OFF.
2 RS-232C connector Used to connect a PC.
Used to connect a field network.
These connectors are also used to connect the NX-50 Series
Field network
3 through a multi-drop link.
connectors
The wiring of the field network connector is different depending on
the model of the NX-50 Series.
This terminal block is used to connect a 24 VDC power supply. The
4 Power supply terminals
FG terminal must be connected to the class D ground.
Used to connect a PLC or other I/O devices (NPN/PNP).
5 I/O terminals
( Page 2-25)
6 Display Shows the status of the NX-50 Series.
Shows the status of the network communication.
Network communication
7 The type of the LED is different depending on the model of the NX-50
status LEDs
Series.
Shows the status of communication with the head as follows:
ACCESS: Lights when communicating with the head.
Head communication status
8 M1/OK: Lights when an OK signal is output from the head.
LEDs
M2/NG: Lights when an NG signal is output from the head.
M3/ERR: Lights when an ERR signal is output from the head.
9 Operation switches Used to operate the NX-50 Series.
10 Head connector Used to connect the RF Series, BL Series, or SR Series.
11 DIN rail mounting tab A tab used to secure the NX-50 Series onto a DIN rail.
1-11
1-3 System Configuration and Setup Flow
1 System configuration
Overview
The BL-1300 Series is used with the following devices.
Dedicated
BL-1300 Series
communication unit
N-R2 N-R4
N-UB N-L1
NX-50 Series
NX-50RS
NX-50CL
Configuration tools
Personal computer NX-50DN

(PC)
AutoID data controller

AutoID Navigator
integration/ DV-90
configuration software
OP-80616
1-12
Overview
Host
PC
USB
RS-232C
RS-422A
RS-485
Ethernet
PC
RS-485
master unit
RS-485
N-410 PLC
PLC
(CC-Link master unit)
CC-Link
PLC
(DeviceNet master unit)
DeviceNet
PLC
Parallel output
1-13
1 Setup flow
Overview
This section describes the flow of the setup procedure required before operation of the BL-1300
series is started.
Unpack the product and check the package contents.

1 "Chapter 1 Overview"
Connect the BL-1300 Series to a communication unit and a PC.

2 "Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring"
Prepare the setting data with AutoID Navigator and send it to the BL-1300 Series.
3 "Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation"
Install the BL-1300 Series according to the use environment.

4 "Chapter 5 Installation"
Adjust the reading performance of the BL-1300 Series.

5 "Chapter 3 Functions of the BL-1300 Series"
Start the operation.
1-14
2
Connection and Wiring
This chapter describes the connection and wiring between the BL-1300
Series and communication unit/peripheral devices.
2-1 Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the Dedicated

Communication Unit ................................................... 2-2
2-2 Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit ................ 2-3
2-3 Connecting the Network Controller........................... 2-19
2-4 Connection without Using the Communication Unit . 2-29
2-1
2-1 Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit
Connect the BL-1300 Series to the head port of the dedicated communication unit (N-R2/R4/UB/L1).
Note To connect the BL-1300 Series to the dedicated communication unit (N-R2/R4/UB/L1), set
2 the baud rate of the BL-1300 Series to 4800 bits/s or faster.
Connection illustration
The BL-1300 Series and dedicated communication unit are connected in the following way.
* Although the figure shows the model "N-R2", the head port
is located in the same position on all models.
Pin layout of the head port
Round 12-pin jack Pin Signal

Name Signal name
number direction
1 OUT1 For OUT1 input Input
2 1
6 5 4 3
3 RXD Data reception Input
10 9 8 7
4 RTS Transmission request Output
12 11
6 IN2 For IN2 output Output
7 TXD Data transmission Output
8 CTS Transmission permitted Input
10 IN1 For IN1 output Output
11 +5V +5V power supply Output
12 GND GND -
CAUTION Install and remove connection cables with the power OFF.
TIP To extend the cable between the BL-1300 Series and dedicated communication unit, use
the optional extension cable NX-C03R (cable length: 3 m), NX-C05R (cable length: 5 m), or
NX-C08R (cable length: 8 m).
2-2
2-2 Wiring the Dedicated Communication Unit
This section describes the wiring of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 dedicated communication unit.
Connecting the DC power supply 2

This section describes how to connect a DC power supply.
Connecting the power supply terminal
Connect the 24 VDC power supply to the power supply terminal block as shown in the figure.
Twisted pair cable

Power supply
+10%
DC 24VDC
-20%
* Although the figure shows the model "N-R2", the power supply
terminals are located in the same position on all models.
CAUTION Do not use a power supply other than 24 V DC. Otherwise, product failure may
occur.
Applicable terminals for power supply connection

The dimensions of crimp contacts used for wiring should be as follows:
Terminal Dimensions
Round Terminal a : 6.0 mm Max.
Y terminal a : 6.0 mm Max.
Item Description
Wire size AWG 14 to 22
Tightening torque 0.49 Nm (4.34 lbfin)
Wire material Copper
Wire type Stranded wire
Electric wire
+60C
temperature rating
2-3
I/O terminal layout and wiring
2 I/O terminal layout

These terminals are used to connect I/O devices such as a PLC.

Signal
Symbol Description
direction
INCOM Common for IN terminal -
IN1 Used as an input terminal for
Input
IN2 the code reader.
OUTCOM Common for OUT terminal -
OUT1
OUT2 Used as an output terminal from
Output
OUT3 the code reader.
OUT4 * Although the figure shows the model
"N-R2", the I/O terminals are located in
the same position on all models.
For connection, use stranded copper wire with a gauge of AWG16 to 26.
CAUTION Limit the tightening torque for the terminal block screws to 0.19 Nm
(1.7 Lbfin) or less.
TIP The power supply terminal block and the I/O terminal block are insulated from each other.
The INCOM and OUTCOM terminals are insulated from each other.
Applicable crimp terminal

Use a bar terminal with the following dimensions for the connection.
1.5 mm max. 3.5 mm max.
5 mm max.
Wiring the IN1 and IN2 terminals
The IN1 and IN2 terminals are used to input trigger signals, preset registration data, or to send laser
emission stop signals to the BL-1300.
The inputs are energized when 15 to 26.4 V DC is connected between the corresponding input terminals.
Circuit diagram
IN1, IN2
Internal
circuit
INCOM
2-4
Connection to a photoelectric sensor manufactured by KEYENCE

For this connection, the IN1 terminal is used as the trigger input terminal.

Photoelectric sensor
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Wiring the OUT 1 through OUT 4 terminals
The OUT terminals can be used to verify OK/NG readings, and other status outputs from the BL-1300
Series.
The output form is photo MOS relay.
Circuit diagram
OUT1 to OUT4
Internal circuit
Load Load
Load OUTCOM
Load
Load
Connection to a PLC (programmable logic controller) manufactured by

KEYENCE
PLC
0003
0002
0001
0000
C
2-5
Wiring of an RS-232C port device (N-R2)
2 Pin layout of the RS-232C port

The pin layout of the RS-232C port of the N-R2 is as follows.
1 2 3 4 5
D-sub 9-pin (male)
DTE specification (terminal definition)
#4-40 screw (female)
6 7 8 9
Signal
Pin number Symbol Description
direction
2 RD (RXD) Data reception Input
3 SD (TXD) Data transmission Output
4 ER (DTR) Connected to Pin 6 internally Output
5 SG Signal ground -
6 DR (DSR) Connected to Pin 4 internally Input
7 RS (RTS) Transmission request (always ON) Output
8 CS (CTS) Transmission permitted Input
2-6
Wiring the RS-232C cable
Connect the N-R2 to a host device (PC, PLC, etc.) according to the following wiring diagram.
2
Connection to a PC

PC N-R2
Connector case Connector case * It can be connected with
RD 2 2 RD Keyences optional
SD 3 3 SD cable OP-27937 (2 m).
RS 7 7 RS
CS 8 8 CS
ER 4 4 ER
DR 6 6 DR
SG 5 5 SG
D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin

(female) (female)
#4-40 screw #4-40 screw
Connection to the handheld programmer for the KEYENCE, KV Series
Handheld programmer N-R2

RD 3 2 RD
* Keyence's optional cable
SD 5 3 SD
4 ER
OP-26487 (2.5 m) and
6 DR OP-26486 can be used.
7 RS
8 CS
SG 4 5 SG
Modular D-sub 9-pin
connector (female)
#4-40 screw
Connection to the KV-L21V/L20V/L20R/N10L

KV-L21V/L20V/L20R(PORT1) N-R2 KV-L21V/L20V/L20R(PORT2) N-R2
KV-N10L
Connector Connector
FG 9 case case
RD 2 2 RD RD 3 2 RD
SD 3 3 SD SD 5 3 SD
RS 7 7 RS 7 RS
CS 8 8 CS 8 CS
ER 4 4 ER 4 ER
DR 6 6 DR 6 DR
SG 5 5 SG SG 1 5 SG
D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin Terminal block D-sub 9-pin

(female) (female) (female)
#4-40 screw #4-40 screw #4-40 screw
* It can be connected with Keyences optional cable OP-27937 (2 m).
2-7
Connection to a MELSEC Series PLC

AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2/PR
2 AJ71QC24N/-R2 A1SJ71QC24N/-R2
QJ71C24N/-R2
Link unit N-R2 Link unit N-R2

Connector Connector Connector
FG 1 case case case
SD 2 2 RD RD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD SD 3 3 SD
RS 4 7 RS RS 7 7 RS
CS 5 8 CS CS 8 8 CS
DR 6 4 ER ER 4 4 ER
SG 7 5 SG DR 6 6 DR
CD 8 6 DR SG 5 5 SG
ER 20 CD 1
D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin

(male) (female) (male) (female)
M2.6 screw #4-40 screw M2.6 screw #4-40 screw
Connection to a SYSMAC Series PLC

CS1W-SCB-V1
CS1W-SCU-V1
CJ1W-SCU-V1
CP1W-CIF01
PLC N-R2
FG 1 Connector case
SD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD
RS 4 7 RS
CS 5 8 CS
SG 9 5 SG
D-sub 9-pin D-sub 9-pin
(male) (female)
M2.6 screw #4-40 screw
2-8
Wiring of an RS-422A/485 port device (N-R4)
Terminal layout of the RS-422A connector 2

Signal
Symbol Description
direction
SD+ Data transmission + side Output
SD Data transmission side Output
SG Signal ground -
RD+ Data reception + side Input
RD Data reception side Input
* The connector labeled with the RS-485 terminal layout. To use RS-422A, attach the label showing
the RS-422A terminal layout.
Note The extended distance of the cable must not exceed 1.2 km.
Set the terminating resistance switch/termination resistor (100) of both the N-R4 and
external device to ON.
Wiring the RS-422A cable
Use a twisted pair cable to establish an RS-422A connection.

Recommended RS-422A cable (with shield)
Manufacturer: NIHON ELECTRIC WIRE & CABLE Co., LTD
Product name: Instrumentation cable
Model: KNPEV-SB 0.75 mm2 x 2P
Wiring of a general RS-422A device

External device (N-R4) N-R4
SG SG
RD+ SD+
RD- SD-
SD+ RD+
SD- RD-
Twisted pair cable
KV-L20V/L20R (RS-422A)
KV-L20V/L20R (Port 2) N-R4
SG SG
RDB SD+
RDA SD-
SDB RD+
SDA RD-
Twisted pair cable
2-9
Terminal layout of RS-485
2 485+ Signal
Symbol Description
direction
485 485+ RS-485 + side I/O

485 RS-485 side I/O
SG
SG Signal ground
Unused
Note The extended distance of the cable must not exceed 1.2 km.
Set the terminating resistance switch (100) of the N-R4 located at the end of the RS-485
trunk line to ON.
To use the multi-drop connection, the N-410 master unit must be used.
Wiring the RS-485 cable
Use a twisted pair cable for RS-485 connection.

Recommended RS-485 cable
Manufacturer: THE FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Product name: Instrumentation cable
Model: KPEV-SB (1P) 0.75 mm2
N-410 (Multi-drop communication)

N-410*
N-R4 N-R4 N-R4
485+ 485+ 485+ RS-485+

485- 485- 485- RS-485-
SG SG SG RS-485 SG
Set the terminating resistance switches of the N-R4 and N-410 marked with * to ON.
Up to 31 units N-R4 units can be connected to a single N-410.

Limit the total extension of the RS-485 cables to 1.2 km.
Note Do not supply power to the N-R4 from the 24 V DC OUT terminal of the N-410.
Never use a terminal block connection at a midpoint of the RS-485 cable connection.
Avoid branching of the RS-485 connection as shown in the figure below.
(With a branch) (No branch)
N-R4 N-R4 N-410 N-R4* N-R4 N-410*
N-R4 N-R4
Terminating resistance switch: ON
Set the baud rate of the BL-1300 Series to 4800 bits/s or faster.
2-10
Processing the communication cable
1 Remove about 70 mm of the cables sheath.

2

Sheath
About 70 mm
2 Cover the bare shield wires and the sheath portion with a contraction tube about 40 mm in
length.
Contraction tube
About 40 mm
3 Standard together the shield mesh wires as the example below illustrates. Then prepare the
insulated wires. (5 wires are required for RS-422A and 3 wires are required for RS-485)
Shield wire
Insulated wire
4 Remove the cover of each insulated wire about 8 mm from the tip.
About 8 mm
5 Perform preliminary soldering on each wire about 6 mm from the tip.

The external diameter of the soldered wire must not exceed 2 mm.
2 mm or less
2-11
RS-422A/RS-485 changeover switch and terminating resistance switch
2 Before using the N-R4, select either RS-422A or RS-485 communication using the switch on the unit.
Moreover, when the N-R4 is located at the end of the communication line, set the terminating
resistance switch (100 ) to ON.
Set the switches according to the table below.
RS-422A RS-485
Terminating
Number communication communication
resistance ON
mode mode
1 Left Right -
2 Left Right -
3 - - Right
* The factory setting is RS-485 communication mode and

terminating resistance OFF.
2-12
Wiring a USB port device (N-UB)
The USB port of the N-UB can only be connected to a computer (PC). 2
Connect the type B side of the USB cable to the N-UB.

Important When using the N-UB to connect to a PC, be sure to set the RTS/CTS protocol setting of the
BL-1300 Series to <Enable>.
USB cable
To the USB port of the

personal computer
Note
The length of the USB cable must be 5 m or less.
Constant vibration may cause a disconnection of the USB cable or a communication error.
In such cases, take appropriate measures to insulate the N-UB from vibration or to better
secure the USB cable.
Installing the USB driver
To connect the N-UB to a PC, first install the USB driver on the PC.
To install the driver, follow the steps below.
Precautions to consider when installing drivers

Applicable operating systems (OS) are Windows 8/7/Vista/XP.
Do not turn on the PC with the N-UB connected to the PC's USB port before installing the USB
driver of the N-UB. This may cause the installation of the USB driver to start during the booting
process of Windows, resulting in improper installation.
2-13
Precautions to consider when connecting to a PC

It may take several seconds before the PC recognizes or ends the connection of a USB device.
2 Consequently, wait at least 10 seconds before connecting/disconnecting the USB device.
Do not connect/disconnect the N-UB device while the PC is in standby mode (suspended).
Do not connect/disconnect other USB devices while the PC is processing the connection of the N-UB.
Do not disconnect the USB cable during communication. If you disconnect the USB cable while the N-UB
is communicating with the PC, not only may the data be lost, damage to the system may also occur.
Driver installation procedure
This section assumes that the USB driver will be installed on a Windows XP-based computer with the
following drive configuration.
Drive C : Hard disk drive
Drive E : DVD-ROM drive
1 Turn on the PC and start Windows.
Note
To install the USB driver, log on as a user with proper rights to change the system
configurations, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.
End all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer
if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.
2 Insert the "AutoID Navigator" into the DVD-ROM drive of the PC.
3 Use Explorer to open the DVD-ROM drive, and double-click "N-UBVCInstaller.exe" in the folder
of the N-UB driver.
4 Click the Install button.
Folder containing the USB driver.
5 Click Continue Anyway.
2-14
6 Click OK and restart the PC.

7 When the PC is restarted, connect the N-UB to the PC.
8 Select "Install the software automatically (Recommended)" and click Next.
9 Click Continue Anyway.
10 Click Finish.
The USB driver of the N-UB has been installed.

2-15
When the USB driver of the N-UB is recognized properly

In the Device Manager window, "KEYENCE N-UB" is displayed under "Ports (COM & LPT)".
2
In this case, the N-UB can be used as a normal COM port with AutoID Navigator.
CAUTION Only one N-UB can be connected to a PC.

Even when several N-UB are connected, only one COM port No. is occupied.
2-16
Driver uninstallation procedure

This section describes the procedure to uninstall the USB driver of the N-UB from a Windows XP-
based computer.
2

Note To uninstall the USB driver, log on as a user with proper rights to change the system
configuration, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.
2 Select Start - Control Panel (C).

The [Control Panel] window appears.
3 Double-click the Add or Remove Programs icon.

The [Add or Remove Programs] dialog box is displayed.
4 Select "KEYENCE N-UB" and click the Remove button.
5 When a program removal confirmation screen is displayed, click the Next button.
The [Removal Confirmation] window appears.
6 Click the Yes button.

The [N-UB Uninstaller Process Completed] window appears.
7 Click the Finish button.
The USB driver of the N-UB has been uninstalled.
2-17
Wiring of a LAN port device (N-L1)
2 Use a straight cable when connecting an N-L1 to the hub; use a crossover cable when
connecting it to a computer (PC) directly.
HUB
Straight cable
Crossover cable
Personal Computer
Use a cable that is category 5 or higher. (Both STP and UTP can be used)
The extended length must not exceed 100 m.
CAUTION The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).
Be sure to supply 24 VDC power to the power terminal.
* For the setting procedure of the N-L1, refer to "Chapter 10 Ethernet Communication" .
Important When using the N-L1, be sure to set the BL-1300 Series to use the baud rate of 4800 bits/s
or faster and to <Enable> the RTS/CTS protocol setting.
2-18
2-3 Connecting the Network Controller
This section describes how to connect a network controller and a BL-1300 Series device and the
wiring of the power supply and I/O terminals.
2
Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the NX-50 Series network controller

The NX-50 Series has the following connection ports:
RS-232C connector
Field network connector

"Wiring a field network" (Page 2-23)
Power supply terminals

"Connecting the DC power supply"
(Page 2-3)
I/O terminals (NPN/PNP) Head connector for the BL-1300

Series
"I/O terminal layout and wiring"
(Page 2-4) "Connection illustration" (Page 2-2)
Connection illustration
The BL-1300 Series and the NX-50 Series unit are connected in the following way.
CAUTION When connecting the NX-50 Series with the BL-1300 Series, set the baud rate of
the BL-1300 Series to 4800 bit/s or more.
2-19
Pin layout of the head port
2 Round 12-pin jack Pin number Name Signal name

1 OUT1 For OUT1 input

2 1
3 RXD RS 232C reception
6 5 4 3
4 RTS RS 232C reception permitted
10 9 8 7 5 OUT4 For OUT4 input
12 11 6 IN2 For IN2 output
7 TXD RS 232C transmission
8 CTS RS 232C transmission permitted
10 IN1 For IN1 output
11 +5V +5V power supply
12 GND GND
TIP To extend the cable between the BL-1300 Series and NX50 Series, use the optional
extension cable NX-C03R (cable length: 3 m), NX-C05R (cable length: 5 m), or NX-C08R
(cable length: 8 m).
DC power supply
This section describes the connection of a power supply.
Connecting the power supply terminal

Connect the 24 VDC power supply to the power supply terminal block as shown in the figure.
Power Protective
supply grounding
24 V DC10%
Twist the wires
in this section.
24 V DC 0V
CAUTION Use a 24 V DC Class 2 power supply.

Be sure to provide Class D ground (ground resistance: 100 W max.).
2-20
Applicable terminals for power supply connection

The dimensions of crimp contacts used for wiring should be as follows:
Terminal
Round Terminal
Dimensions
a: 8.0 mm Max
2

Y terminal a: 6.0 mm Max
Item Description
Wire size AWG14-20
Tightening torque 0.51 Nm (4.5 lbfin)
Wire material Copper
Wire type Stranded wire
Electric wire
+60C
temperature rating
I/O terminal layout and connection
I/O terminal layout diagram
These terminals are used to input/output NPN or PNP signals to/from an I/O device such as a PLC.
Both NPN connectors and PNP connectors are provided.
NPN connectors
PNP connectors
CAUTION Use AWG16 to AWG30 wire for connection.

The terminal block contains two types of connectors: Those for NPN outputs
and for PNP outputs.
Pay particular attention to the output type (NPN/PNP). Incorrect wiring may
Do not use the NPN and PNP input circuits at the same time because they are
internally connected.
The OUT and IN terminals of the power supply terminal block and I/O terminal
block are insulated from each other.
The INCOM and OUTCOM terminals are short-circuited internally.
2-21
The BL-1300 Series has the following pin terminal assignment.

Symbol Description Signal direction
2 IN1
IN2
Use the terminal as an input terminal
to the BL-1300 Series.
Input
* The assignment is common to
INCOM Common terminal for IN both NPN and PNP connectors.
OUTCOM Common terminal for OUT

* The operation of each terminal is
OUT1
common to the I/O terminals
OUT2 Use the terminal as an output terminal assigned in the Multi-I/O
Output
OUT3 to the BL-1300 Series. functions of the BL-1300 Series.
OUT4
Wiring and circuit diagram of the NPN connectors
Connecting an NPN output type PLC or other device to the input terminals of the NX-50 Series
External device 3.3k

Photocoupler isolation
Internal circuit
OUT(NPN) IN*(NPN)
430
COM COMIN(NPN)
Connecting the NPN output of the NX-50 Series to a PLC or other device
External device Photocoupler isolation
Internal circuit
IN OUT*(NPN)
33V
680
COM COMOUT(NPN)
Wiring and circuit diagram of the PNP connectors
Connecting a PNP output type PLC or other device to the input terminals of the NX-50 Series
External device 3.3k Photocoupler isolation

Internal circuit
COM IN*(PNP)
430
OUT(PNP) COMIN(PNP)
Connecting the PNP output of the NX-50 Series to a PLC or other device
External device 680 Photocoupler

Internal circuit
COM COMOUT(PNP) isolation
33V
IN OUT*(PNP)
2-22
Wiring a field network
To establish a multi-drop connection with a master unit or network controller in a field network, or to 2
connect a slave unit in a field network, use the following guide to establish a connection with an NX-

50 Series device.
Processing the communication cable
Select the type of communication cable according to the field network to be connected.
Network controller Recommended cable
RS-485 controller Twisted pair cable for RS-485
NX-50RS Furukawa Electric Instrumentation cable KPEV-SB 1P 0.75 mm2
CC-Link controller
CC-Link dedicated cable (Version 1.10 or higher)
NX-50CL
DeviceNet controller
DeviceNet dedicated 5-wire cable
NX-50DN
1 Remove the sheath (outer covering) of the cable.

Remove about 70 mm of the sheath on the cable.
Limit the exposure of the braided shield to 6 mm or less.
Sheath
6 mm or less
Braided shield
Approx. 70 mm
2 Cover the bare portion with a contraction tube.

Cover the bare insulated wires and the sheath portion with a contraction tube about 40 mm in length.
Approx. 40 mm
Sheath
Contraction tube
3 Remove the insulation of each wire.

Remove about 8 mm of insulation from each wire.
Insulated wire
Approx. 8 mm
2-23
4 Perform preliminary soldering on each bare wire approximately 6 mm from the tip.
The external diameter of the soldered wire must not exceed 0.17 mm.
2 Bare wire 40 mm
0.17 mm or less
Approx. 8 mm
Note The procedure above is for a CC-Link or DeviceNet network which uses a 5-wire cable.
For an RS-485 network, a 3-wire cable is used.
Connecting the communication cable
Connect the processed communication cable to the field network connector.
TIP The field network connector of the NX Series is a multi-drop connector which can be used
for the multi-drop connection of slave units.
1 Insert each signal wire into the appropriate hole of the connector.
Insert the signal wire into the
corresponding connector terminal.
Important
Fully loosen the clamp screws of the connector before inserting the signal wires.
2 Tighten the clamp screw of the connector to secure the signal wire.
Tighten the clamp screw to

secure the wire.
The wiring is different depending on the model of the network controller.

Refer to the following sections for proper insertion of the signal wires.
2-24
Wiring of the CC-Link controller (NX-50CL)
The field network connector of the NX-50CL should be wired as follows:

2
DA Signal name Function

DA Communication signal High
DB
DB Communication signal Low
DG DG Communication ground
SLD SLD Cable shield
FG Frame ground
FG
Important Use a CC-Link dedicated cable (Version 1.10 or higher) to connect the CC-Link controller
to CC-Link.
To connect the CC-Link controller to each station, ground the cable shield to FG.
Connection example
CC-Link dedicated cable (Version 1.10 or higher)
For the wiring of the CC-Link master unit, refer to the manual of the device used as the CC-Link
master unit.
Important Set the terminating resistance switch to ON when the NX-50CL is connected at the end of
the network.
2-25
Wiring of the DeviceNet controller (NX-50DN)
2 The field network connector of the NX-50DN should be wired as follows:
V- Signal Cable
Description
CAN_L name color
V- Black Communication power supply (0 VDC input)
SHIELD
CAN_L Blue Communication signal Low
CAN_H Bare
SHIELD Shield
V+ wire
CAN_H White Communication signal High
V+ Red Communication power supply (24 VDC input)
Note The connector of the DeviceNet controller is labeled by color. Connect each cable to the hole
of the same color.
Connection example
DeviceNet dedicated cable
For wiring the DeviceNet master unit, refer to the manual of the device used as the DeviceNet master
unit.
Important Set the terminating resistance switch to ON when the NX-50DN is connected at the end of
the trunk line.
2-26
Wiring of the RS-485 controller (NX-50RS)
The field network connector of the NX-50RS should be wired as follows:

2
485+ Signal name Description

485+ Communication signal High
485-
485 Communication signal Low
SG SG Communication ground
Unused
Note
The RS-485 connection cable can be extended to 1.2 km.
Connection example
RS-232C cable
(OP-29860)
Twisted pair cable for the RS-485
To connect the NX-50RS to a host PC in a system using an RS-485 connection use the N-410, an RS-
485 master unit must be used. For wiring of the N-410, refer to N-410 User's Manual.
Note
Set the terminating resistance switch to ON when the NX-50RS is connected at the end of
the network.
2-27
Wiring of the PC
2 To connect the network controller to a PC in the system using RS-232C, use the optional RS-232C
modular cable (OP-26487) and D-sub 9-pin connector (OP-26486).
RS-232C modular cable D-sub 9-pin connector

OP-26487 OP-26486
Pin layout of the RS-232C modular connector

Network PC side Network PC side
controller side D-sub 9-pin controller side D-sub 25-pin
Pin No. on the Straight cable OP-26487 Straight cable OP-26487

network + +
controller side D-sub 9-pin connector OP-26486 D-sub 25-pin connector OP-26485
(Crossover connection) (Crossover connection)
2-28
2-4 Connection without Using the Communication Unit
This section describes the connection and wiring when no communication unit is used.
Pin layout and connection of BL-1300 Series connector 2

Pin layout

The connector of the BL-1300 Series has the following pin BL-1300/1301/1300HA/
1301HA/1370/1371
layout.
Pin layout of the BL-1300
Cable head cross-section view

1 2
RP17-13PA-12PC plug (male)
3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
11 12 Manufactured by
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
BL-1350HA/1351HA
Pin number Cable color Symbol Explanation

1 White OUT1 Output pin 1 (default: OK output)
2 Gray OUT2 Output pin 2 (default: NG/ERROR output)
3 Purple TXD RS-232C transmission
4 Blue CTS RS-232C transmission permitted
5 Light blue OUT4 Output pin 4 (default: BUSY output)
6 Green IN2 Input pin 2 (default: PRESET input)
7 Brown RXD RS-232C reception
8 Pink RTS RS-232C reception permitted
9 Orange OUT3 Output pin 3 (default: ERROR output)
10 Yellow IN1 Input pin 1 (default: TIMING input)
11 Red +5V +5V power supply
12 Black GND (SG) Common GND
* The shield line is directly connected to the common GND.
2-29
Connecting the power supply
2 Connect a cable with a length of 4.8 m or less.

+5V 11
5 V DC
GND 12
Note
Reverse connection of the power supply is strictly prohibited. This may cause product
failure.
Use a stable power supply of 5 V DC 5%. Using a power supply outside this range may
Following UL standards, use a power supply of NEC Class2.
Wiring IN1/IN2 input pins
The IN1 (timing) input is used to trigger the BL-1300 Series to read barcodes (to emit a laser
beam).
The IN2 (preset) input is used to trigger the BL-1300 Series to register barcode data.
IN1/IN2 inputs are non voltage inputs.

Internal circuit
4.7 k
10 k 100 TIM
6,10 Contact
or
non-contact
12
GND
5 V DC
2-30
Wiring OUT1/OUT2/OUT3/OUT4 output pins
OUT1 (OK) output is used to indicate that reading has been successfully completed and that the
comparison and matching with preset data is judged OK.
2

OUT2 (NG/ERROR) output is used to indicate that reading has failed and that the comparison and
matching with preset data is judged as NG.
OUT3 (ERROR) output is used to indicate that reading has failed.
OUT4 (BUSY) is output any time the trigger input cannot be accepted. For example, a busy signal
will be output when the BL-1300 Series is at initial start-up or in setting mode, the motor/laser is
damaged, the motor/laser is locked, or the number of rotations of the motor is changed.
The output form of each signal is NPN open collector.

Internal circuit
3.3 k OK/NG
1, 2, Load
33 V 5, 9
6.8 k
12
GND
* Rated load: 24 V DC (30 mA) or less
Wiring RS-232C
When connecting the BL-1300 Series to the PC, connect as shown below.
BL-1300 Series DOS/V PC
TxD 3 2 RxD(RD)
CTS 4 7 RTS(RS)
RxD 7 3 TxD(SD)
RTS 8 8 CTS(CS)
GND 12 5 GND(SG)
+5V 11 4 DTR(ER)
Round 6 DSR(DR)
connector + D-sub9 pin
12-pin (female)
(male) #4-40 screw
2-31
OP-80616 wiring diagram
2 The following wiring diagram shows the conversion cable OP-80616.

Cable is 200 mm long.
D-sub 9-pin
Connector (female)
TIMING 10 1 TIM
RXD 7 2 RD
TXD 3 3 SD
OK 1 4 OK
NG 2 5 GND
RTS 8 6 NG
CTS 4 7 RS
+5V 11 8 CS
BUSY 5 9 +5V
PRESET 6 Connector case
GND(SG) 12
Round 12-pin D-sub 9-pin

(female) (female)
#4-40 sc rew
TIP Round 12-pin connector RP-17-13JA-12SC(71)

Made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
D-Sub 9-pin connector JEZ-9S-3

Connector case J-SC9A
J-SC9B
Made by J.S.T. Connector
2-32
3
Functions of the BL-1300
Series
This chapter describes the various functions of the BL-1300 Series.
3-1 Basic Operation.......................................................... 3-2

3-2 Preset/Verify Function ................................................. 3-5
3-3 Test Mode ................................................................... 3-7
3-4 Auto-trigger Mode .................................................... 3-13
3-5 Multi-I/O Function ..................................................... 3-15
3-6 Scan Count Setting Function .................................... 3-19
3-7 Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) Addition
Function .................................................................... 3-20
3-8 Silent Mode............................................................... 3-22
3-9 AGC/Parameter Bank Mode ..................................... 3-25
3-10 Bar Code Position Detection Function...................... 3-29
3-11 Bar Code Composition Function .............................. 3-30
3-12 Quick Setup Bar Code.............................................. 3-33
3-1
3-1 Basic Operation
The section describes the basic operations of the BL-1300 Series.
TEST button operation
3 The TEST button can be used to perform the following actions.
LED
Functions of the BL-1300 Series
Operation Laser beam Action

indication
Press once briefly (less Perform one reading action.

Illuminates
than 3 seconds). When a bar code is read, the laser beam stops.
Hold down for 3 seconds Not

Activate the reading rate test mode.
and then release. illuminated
Hold down for 5 seconds Illuminates

Activate the tact measurement test mode.
and then release. once
Hold down for 7 seconds Illuminates

Activate the bar code position test mode.
and then release. once
Hold down for 9 seconds Illuminates Activate the quick setup bar code reading
and then release. twice mode.
Hold down for 11 seconds Illuminates 3 Reset the communication parameters to the
and then release. times factory-default settings.
* To quit each action/mode, press the TEST button once briefly.

* The communication parameters factory settings are as follows:
Baud rate : 9600 bits/s Header : None
Data length : 7 bits Terminator : CR
Parity : Even Stop bit length : 1 bit
"3-3 Test Mode" (Page 3-7)
"3-12 Quick Setup Bar Code" (Page 3-33)
3-2
3-1 Basic Operation
External input operation and output signals
The I/O terminals of the BL-1300 Series are factory-configured as follows.
Terminal
IN1 Trigger input
Function
3
Input terminal
IN2 Preset data registration

OUT1 OK
OUT2 NG + ERROR
OUT3 ERROR
Output terminal TRG BUSY
LOCK BUSY
OUT4
MODE BUSY
ERR BUSY
Operation flow
The operation to read a bar code with the factory-configured BL-1300 Series is performed in the
following steps:
When the trigger input (IN1) turns on, the laser beam is emitted.
1
While the laser beam is emitted, the BUSY signal (OUT4) turns on.
2
When a bar code is read successfully, the laser beam stops. The read data is output
3 and the OK signal (OUT1) turns on.
If a bar code cannot be read (if no bar code exists), read error data (ERROR) is output
4 when the trigger input (IN1) turns off, and a read error signal (OUT2 + OUT3) turns on.
The BUSY signal (OUT4) turns off simultaneously with the termination of the laser
5 emission.
3-3
3-1 Basic Operation
Timing diagram of the bar code reading (factory-default setting)
Read successful Read failed

Trigger input
(IN1)
3 Bar code
Laser beam
Data
Read ERROR
transmission data
Output terminal
OK ERROR
(OUT1 to OUT3)
Output terminal
BUSY BUSY
(OUT4)
* The read data or read error data is output from the BL-1300 Series in ASCII code. Users can write
the data to the host using the dedicated communication unit. (The data can be viewed on the
Terminal screen of AutoID Navigator.)
* The output terminal (OUT1 to OUT4) turns on for 500 ms. Users can connect it to a PLC or other
device.
* When the preset data registration input is turned on, the BL-1300 Series will register bar code data
after reading.
"3-2 Preset/Verify Function" (Page 3-5)
3-4
3-2 Preset/Verify Function
This section describes the preset/verify function.
Outline of the preset/verify function
This function allows the BL-1300 Series to verify the read barcode data against the registered
barcode data (preset data), and output an OK/NG signal to indicate whether or not they match. This
3

allows the BL-1300 Series to perform simple detection of different bar codes without a sensor or other
devices. One piece of preset data (74 digits max.; or 148 digits max. when CODE128 is used with
start code C) can be registered with the BL-1300 Series.
Note When the preset function is used, the preset data registration and verification using the
maximum code length output function are disabled. (The output data is limited to the
specified length.) To verify data using the maximum code length output function, you need
to use the DV-90 Series AutoID data controller.
To register several pieces of preset data, use the DV-90 Series AutoID data controller.
Registering preset data
There are several ways to register preset data with the BL-1300 Series:
Read a target bar code by turning on the external input terminal.
(You need to assign the preset data registration function to the external input terminal in advance.
"Functions assigned to the input terminals" (Page 3-15))
Use AutoID Navigator. ( "Other settings" (Page 4-24))
Send a setting command. ( "Other settings" (Page 4-24))
Read a target bar code by pressing the TEST button.
(You need to assign the preset data registration function to the TEST button.
"Other settings" (Page 4-24))
Output format when preset data is registered

When the BL-1300 Series is used to read a bar code to register preset data, it outputs the read data
in the following format.
Header PRnn : Preset data Terminator
nn = 00 to 02
00: Preset data has been registered successfully.
01: Read error
02: Preset data format error
Example 1: When bar code data "KEYENCE" is registered as preset data

Output for successful registration: [Header]PR00: KEYENCE[Terminator]
Output for reading failure : [Header]PR01: ERROR[Terminator]
Example 2: When bar code data "ABC!123!456!DEF" is registered as preset data
[Header]PR02:ABC!123!456!DEF[Terminator]
*This causes a format error because the data contains more than two "!'s".
Refer to "Using "!" and "?" in the preset data" (Page 3-6).
3-5
3-2 Preset/Verify Function
Output terminal operation
The output terminals perform the following operation.

Bar code is read successfully. + Data matches the preset data.OK output
3 Bar code is read successfully. + Data does not match the preset data.NG output
Bar code reading failed.ERROR output
Preset data is registered successfully.PRESET output
Note By default, the PRESET output is not assigned to any of OUT1 to OUT4 terminals.
To connect the PRESET output to an external device, you need to assign the PRESET
output to an appropriate OUT terminal.
Using "!" and "?" in the preset data
The use of "!" and "?" in the preset data adds flexibility for the data comparison and verification.
"!" . . . . . . .This character represents an unlimited number of digits. Use it to regard any number of
any characters as being matched (OK).
If the preset data is "ABC!", all bar codes that begin with "ABC" are verified as a match. If
the preset data is "!ABC", all bar codes that end with "ABC" are verified as a match.
Up to two "!'s" can be used in the preset data.
"?" . . . . . . .This character represents one digit. 1Use it to regard any one-digit character as being
matched (OK).
If the preset data is "AB??56", two digits positioned in "??" can contain any characters
(numeric values) to be verified as a match.
TIP If no preset data is registered, the BL-1300 Series automatically assumes that "!" is
registered as the preset data. Consequently, it outputs OK when it reads a bar code
successfully, and outputs ERROR when it fails reading, regardless of the data of a bar code.
3-6
3-3 Test Mode
This section describes the test mode of the BL-1300 Series.
Test mode of the BL-1300 Series
The BL-1300 Series provides the following five test modes.

You can select an appropriate test mode according to the purpose.
3

Test mode Description
Reading ratio test mode Measures a reading ratio which indicates how many scans the BL-1300
Series can properly read while scanning with a laser beam 100 times.
Tact measurement test mode Counts how many scans the BL-1300 Series can properly read (decode)
while reading a moving bar code.
Bar code position test mode Measures the position of a target bar code in the laser beam field.
Online test mode 1 Measures the number of scans and the number of decoding successes
during one trigger input.
Online test mode 2 Measures the number of scans and the number of decoding successes
during one trigger input for each parameter bank.
* The online test modes 1 and 2 are activated by the start command sent from the host. They cannot
be activated by the TEST button or by the start test mode signal sent through the external input
terminal.
Test mode measurement result
Measurement results of the BL-1300 Series can be checked in real time with the STABILITY LEDs and
the OK/NG/ERR LED on the unit.
Test mode
Reading ratio test mode Tact measurement test mode
OK/NG/ERR Decoding OK/NG/ERR Bar code position test mode
Reading ratio STB LED indication STB LED indication
LED success LED
The width of the laser beam
field is divided into 9999 equal
81 to 100% 5 LEDs ON Green 100 or more 5 LEDs ON *1
sections to indicate the range
from the start to stop characters
of the read bar code.
*1
61 to 80% 4 LEDs ON Green 50 or more 4 LEDs ON (One LED shows 2000 sections
of the laser beam field.)
*1 LED5: 8001 to 9999

41 to 60% 3 LEDs ON Green 10 or more 3 LEDs ON LED4: 6001 to 8000
LED3: 4001 to 6000
LED2: 2001 to 4000
*1 LED1: 0000 to 2000
21 to 40% 2 LEDs ON Green 5 or more 2 LEDs ON
Indication example
*1
1 to 20% 1 LED ON Green 1 or more 1 LED ON
OK/NG/ERR LED indication

No bar code exists
(can be read): Red
Read error No LED ON Red Read error No LED ON OFF
A bar code exists.: Green
*1 In the tact measurement test mode, the color of the OK/NG/ERR LED depends on the decode
match count specified for the BL-1300 Series:
When decoding success is less than the decode match count: Red
When decoding success is the same or more than the decode match count: Green
3-7
3-3 Test Mode
Test mode details
This section describes the details of each test mode.
3 Reading ratio test mode
The reading ratio test mode measures how many scans the BL-1300 Series can properly read while
scanning a laser beam 100 times, and outputs the result as a reading ratio. You can determine the
best reading position by using this mode to adjust the reading distance or angle before installing the
BL-1300 Series.
Starting/quitting the reading ratio test mode

The reading ratio test mode can be started/quit by any of the following methods:
Start: Hold down the TEST button of the BL-1300 Series for 3 seconds.
Quit: Press the TEST button once briefly.
Start: Send TEST1 command from the PC.
Quit: Send QUIT command from the PC.
Start: Assign the function to start this test mode to the input terminal and turn it on.
Quit: Turn off the input terminal.
Start/quit: Operate the switch of the NX-50 Series/DV-90 Series.
* For the operation of the NX-50 Series or DV-90 Series, refer to the User's Manual of the
respective model.
Output data of the reading ratio test mode

The result is output in the following format for every 100 scans of the laser beam.
Header Read data : a % Terminator
a = Reading ratio: 0 to 9100

The separation character ":" can be changed.
Note A higher reading ratio indicates more stable and correct reading of bar codes. This,
however, does not mean that the reading is only possible with a reading ratio of 100%. If,
for example, the reading ratio is 20% and the BL-1300 Series is set to perform 500
scans/second, the 100 reading attempts are successful in one second.
If a raster-scanning model (BL-1301/1301HA/1351HA/1371) is used for a bar code with a
short height, some laser beams will not shine on the bar code, resulting in a low reading
ratio. If 4 out of 8 laser beams fail to scan a bar code, the highest reading ratio will be 50%.
Even in such a case, you can ensure more reading successes by providing long enough
scan time for the bar code.
Tact measurement test mode
The tact measurement test mode counts how many scans the BL-1300 Series can properly read
(number of decoding successes) while reading a moving barcode during laser emission, and outputs
the read data and decode count. This mode is useful to confirm if the BL-1300 Series can follow the
speed of a moving target, or how much of a decode count margin there is.
3-8
3-3 Test Mode
Starting/quitting the tact measurement test mode

The tact measurement test mode can be started/quit by any of the following methods:
Quit: Press the TEST button once briefly.
Start: Send TEST2 command from the PC. 3

* For the operation of the NX-50 Series or DV-90 Series, refer to the User's Manual of the respective
model.
Output data of the tact measurement test mode.

The read data is output in the following format when a bar code passes the scanning area of the laser
beam.
Header Read data : b Terminator
b = Number of decoding successes: 1 to 99999

The separation character ":" can be changed.
Note You can judge that the BL-1300 Series is capable for the line speed if the number of
decoding successes is always more than 5 to 10.
If the result is only 1 to 2, you need to take a certain measure such as to perform the
reading ratio test mode and change the position of the BL-1300 Series to obtain a higher
reading ratio.
If the BL-1300 Series reads bar codes containing the same data continuously within 0.2
seconds, it cannot differentiate between the data and continues to increment the decode
count. If it reads bar codes containing different data within 0.2 seconds, it outputs the read
data as different data.
Bar code position test mode
The bar code position test mode measures the position of a target bar code in the laser beam field
for 100 scans and outputs the position of the last-read bar code in real time. This function is useful to
confirm the position of the barcode in the scan width of the laser. It can also be used to check the
path of the bar code in the laser beam field when the bar code is oriented vertically.
3-9
3-3 Test Mode
Starting/quitting the bar code position test mode

The bar code position test mode can be started/quit by any of the following methods:
3 Quit: Press the TEST button once briefly.

Start: Send TEST3 command from the PC.

* For the operation of the NX-50 Series or DV-90 Series, refer to the User's Manual of the respective
model.
Output data of the bar code position test mode.

The measured data is output in the following format for every 100 scans.
Header Read data : aaaa / bbbb Terminator
aaaa= Left end position : 0000 to 9999

bbbb= Right end positon: 0000 to 9999
* When a read error occurs, the output is "ERROR : 0000/0000".
* The separation character ":" can be changed.
* The slash, "/", cannot be changed.
Note The bar code position test mode is intended to check the position of the bar code path in the
laser scanning width. The position test data is not meant to be used to control the stopping
position of objects.
Online test mode 1
The online test mode 1 measures the number of decoding attempts and the number of decoding
successes during one trigger input, and outputs the result. This mode is useful to confirm the
decode count margin of the BL-1300 Series during actual operation. Either the external terminal or
trigger on command can be used as the trigger input.
3-10
3-3 Test Mode
Starting/quitting the online test mode 1

Use the following commands to start/quit the online test mode 1.
Start the online test mode 1 Command : #TEST1
Response : OK
Quit the online test mode 1 Command : #QUIT 3
Response : OK

Output data of the online test mode 1
The measured data is output in the following format when the trigger input signal (command) turns
off. The stability is indicated with the STABILITY LEDs.
Header Read data : aaaa / bbbb Terminator
aaaa = No. of decoding successes: 0 to 99999

bbbb = No. of decoding attempts: 1 to 99999
* When a read error occurs, the output is "ERROR : 0/bbbb".
* The separation character ":" can be changed.
* The slash "/" cannot be changed.
The following is a sample output when the online mode 1 is activated with serial commands.
Note The online test mode 1 is effective only while the BL-1300 Series is turned on.
The mode is canceled when the BL-1300 Series is turned off.
TIP The result of the online test mode can be saved by setting the BL-1300 Series as follows:
Select [Operation setting]
"Data addition function", and then check "Decode count". Check "Scan count".
Select [Utilities] "STABILITY LED", and then check "Use STABILITY LED indication".
Online test mode 2
The online test mode 2 is used when the AGC function is disabled to use the parameter bank
settings. This mode measures the number of decoding attempts and the number of decoding
successes during one trigger input for each parameter bank.
This mode is useful to check which parameter bank provides the most stable reading of a bar code
label.
Either the external terminal or trigger on command can be used as the trigger input.
3-11
3-3 Test Mode
Starting/quitting the online test mode 2

Use the following commands to start/quit the online test mode 2.
Start the online test mode 2 Command : #TEST2
Response : OK
3 Quit the online test mode 2 Command : #QUIT

Response : OK
Note When you send the '#TEST2' command to the BL-1300 Series without disabling its AGC
function, the BL-1300 Series returns "OK", however, it actually remains in the normal reading
mode instead of entering the online test mode 2.
Output data of the online test mode 2

The measured data is output in the following format when the trigger input signal (command) turns
off.
Header Read data : A1 / B1 : A2 / B2 : A3 / B3 : A4 / B4 :
A5 / B5 : A6 / B6 : A7 / B7 : A8 / B8 Terminator
An: No. of decoding successes for parameter bank n (0 to 9999)

Bn : No. of decoding attempts for parameter bank n (0 to 9999)
(n = Parameter bank No.: 0 to 7)
* Even when not all of the eight parameter banks have been set, the data is output for all of the
eight banks.
* The scan count for each bank varies depending on the scan count for parameter change
setting and trigger input time specified for the BL-1300 Series.
The following is a sample output when the online mode 2 is activated with serial commands.
3-12
3-4 Auto-trigger Mode
This section describes the Auto-trigger mode of the BL-1300 Series.
Outline of the Auto-trigger mode
The Auto-trigger mode allows the BL-1300 Series to detect a target by scanning the laser beam
continuously at specified intervals. When the BL-1300 Series detects a target within its scanning
3

range, it automatically reads the bar code of the target without using external trigger inputs or serial
commands.
This mode is useful when it is difficult to install a sensor for synchronization, such as reading work
orders (kanban).
Using the Auto-trigger mode
Setting the Auto-trigger mode operation
To use the Auto-trigger mode of the BL-1300 Series, users must to specify the following options by
using the AutoID Navigator configuration software.
Signal type : Auto-trigger

One-shot input time : 0 to 9990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Specify the scanning period after a target is detected.
If the BL-1300 Series cannot read a bar code within the one-shot input
time, it outputs ERROR.
Trigger scan count : 8 to 248 scans
Specify the scan interval to detect a target with a multiple of 8.
Trigger Interval : Specify the time to start scanning to detect the next target after the one-
shot input time elapses.
"Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation" (Page 4-1)
3-13
3-4 Auto-trigger Mode
Setting the Auto-trigger sensitivity
There are three methods to set the sensitivity of the Auto-trigger operation.
Press the TEST button once briefly.
3 (You need to change the function of the TEST button to "Set Auto-trigger".
"Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation" (Page 4-1)
Turn on the input terminal.

(You need to assign the "Set Auto-trigger" function to the input terminal.
"Functions assigned to the input terminals" (Page 3-15)
Send a serial command (WTEACH).
"Chapter 7 Serial Communication" (Page 7-1)
In any methods above, you need to set the sensitivity while a target (bar code) does not exist.
Note In the Auto-trigger mode, the larger the difference in reflectance between the background
and target surface, the greater the stability for the BL-1300 Series to detect the target.
Check the following when you use the Auto-trigger mode.
There is no reflective object in the The target has no background or the

background of the target. background is far away.
Target (bar code)

surface
If there is something in the

background, make the area scanned
by the laser black.
The background reflectance is lower (darker)

than the bar code surface.
If the TEST button is operated when there is a target in scanning range, the Auto-trigger
sensitivity is adjusted by the target surface. Always ensure that there is no target in
scanning range before starting test mode.
This completes the setting of the Auto-trigger mode. When a target enters the scanning range of the
laser beam, the BL-1300 Series starts reading based on the specified Auto-trigger mode setting.
Limit the distance to the targets surface to whithin 1.5 times that of the focal
CAUTION
distance.
3-14
3-5 Multi-I/O Function
You can assign various operating conditions to the I/O terminals of the BL-1300 Series. This section
describes the operation available with the Multi-I/O function.
Function and operation of the input terminals (IN1 and IN2)

3
Functions assigned to the input terminals

Only one of the following functions can be assigned to each of the input terminals IN1 and IN2.
Trigger input : Use the terminal to start/stop reading bar codes.
Register preset data : Use the terminal to register the preset data with the BL-1300 Series.
Start test mode : Use the terminal to activate the specified test mode.
(This function cannot be used to start the online test mode.)
Set Auto-trigger : Use the terminal to specify the options to use the Auto-trigger mode.
Reset PLC link error : Use the terminal to reset a PLC link error.
Laser lock : Use the terminal to force the laser emission to stop.
Motor lock : Use the terminal to force the internal motor of the BL-1300 Series to
stop.
Read quick setup bar code : Use the terminal to start reading the quick setup bar code created
with AutoID Navigator.
No assignment : Select this option when the terminal is not used as an input terminal.
Use AutoID Navigator or send the setting command to change the setting or assign the function.
* By default, the functions are assigned as follows:

IN1: Trigger input
IN2: Register preset data
3-15
Input terminal status and operation
The table below shows the relationship between the status of the input terminal and the operation of
the assigned function.
3 Function assigned
ON OFF
to the input terminal
Stop reading. (when level signal

Trigger input Start reading.
trigger is used)
Finish preset data registration.
Register preset data Start preset data registration.
(when level signal trigger is used)
Start test mode Activate the test mode. Quit the test mode.
Set Auto-trigger Start the Auto-trigger setting. Finish the Auto-trigger setting.
Reset PLC link error Reset the error. -
Cancel stopping the laser
Laser lock Force the laser emission to stop.
emission
Motor lock Force the motor to stop. Cancel stopping the motor.
Start reading the quick setup bar Stop reading the quick setup bar
Read quick setup bar code
code. code.
* When the signal type for the trigger input is set to "One-shot signal trigger", the "Trigger input" and
"Register preset data" functions are active only for the specified one-shot input time. When the
signal type for the trigger input is set to "Auto-trigger" and the input terminal turns on, the "Trigger
input" and "Register preset data" functions are active only for the specified one-shot input time.
* The other functions, "Start test mode", "Set Auto-trigger", "Reset PLC link error", "Laser lock", "Motor
lock", and "Read quick setup bar code", are active based on the level signal trigger regardless of
the specified signal type.
* When the input terminal assigned with the "Motor lock" function turns on and then turns off, the BL-
1300 Series enters the start-up period until the motor rotation stabilizes. Consequently, reading is
disabled during this period.
Synchronization with TIMING LED

Users can set the BL-1300 Series to illuminate its TIMING LED when the IN1 or IN2 terminal turns on.
When both IN1 and IN2 terminals synchronize with the TIMING LED, the LED illuminates based on
the OR condition of the terminal status.
(By default, only IN1 terminal synchronizes with the LED.)
Input polarity setting

The polarity of the input terminal can be selected from "N.O. (normally open) contact" or "N.C.
(normally closed) contact".
(By default, "N.O. contact" is selected.)
ON at power-on setting
Normally, the input terminal recognize the change in the input signal (ON/OFF) after the BL-1300
Series is turned on and its operation stabilizes. (The input terminal does not operate if the input signal
turns on before the operation stabilizes (approximately 6.5 seconds after power on).)
If "ON at power-on" is enabled, the BL-1300 Series recognizes the input ON status during the start-up
period, and, after the operation stabilizes, it performs the operation specified for the input signal.
(By default, "ON at power-on" is disabled.)
* Even when "ON at power-on" is disabled, the input terminal assigned with the "Laser lock" or
"Motor lock" function recognizes the input ON status during the start-up period and performs the
operation immediately.
3-16
Input time constant setting

Users can set the "Input time constant", the period required for the ON status of the input terminal to
be recognized. The function assigned to the input terminal is activated after the input stays on for the
time specified with "Input time constant" or longer.
(Input time constant setting range: 2 to 10 ms (Default: 2 ms))
3
Function and operation of the output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, and OUT4)

Functions assigned to the output terminals
The following functions can be assigned to the output terminals (OUT1 to OUT4). You can assign one
or more functions to one output terminal.
OK This signal is output when a bar code is read successfully or when the comparison/
verification against preset data matches.
NG This signal is output when the comparison/verification against the preset data does not match.
ERROR This signal is output when a read error occurs.
PRESET This signal is output when the preset data is registered successfully.
POSITION This signal is output when a bar code is read successfully but its position is out of
the right/left end of the specified range.
( "3-10 Bar Code Position Detection Function" (Page 3-29))
BUSY This signal is output to notify that the BL-1300 Series cannot read bar codes
because it is performing a specific operation.
The BUSY signal has the following four variations according to the current status or
operation of the BL-1300 Series.
TRG BUSY : During start-up period, trigger input, or preset data registration
LOCK BUSY : Laser being locked or motor being locked
MODE BUSY : In setting mode or test mode, or during quick setup bar code reading
ERR BUSY : Error occurred (Buffer over, PLC link error, etc.)
Output terminal operation
The output terminals operate differently depending on the assigned function. There are two patterns
of operation as shown below.
Functions affected by the output ON time setting

OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, and POSITION
Timing diagram
ON
Event occurrence
ON
OK/NG/ERROR
PRESET/POSITION Period of time set
for output ON time
* For the above output functions, a higher priority is assigned to the output of the function which
occurred later.
Consequently, when the next operation occurs during the output ON time of the previous operation,
the signal is switched to output the signal of the higher priority function.
3-17
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs an OK signal and then OUT2 outputs a NG signal)
Period of time set for
output ON time
ON
3
OUT1
(OK)
ON
OUT2
(NG) Period of time set for
output ON time
Note If the same operation occurs again within the period of the output ON time, the output turns
off 5 ms once and then turns on again to output the signal of the next operation.
(If the same operation occurs continuously at short intervals, the output turns on for at least 5
ms before turns off and then turns on again.)
Timing diagram (When OUT1 outputs signals continuously)
ON
OUT1 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms
(OK)
Period of time set for
output ON time
Functions not affected by the output ON time setting

TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, and ERR BUSY
The above signals are retained until the corresponding event finishes.
Timing diagram
Event start Event end
Event occurrence
TRG BUSY/ ON
LOCK BUSY/
MODE BUSY/ Period of time set for
ERR BUSY output ON time
* If all BUSY functions are assigned to one output terminal, the output signal does not turn off until all
events finish.
TIP When the motor lock function (command or input terminal) is used, the "LOCK BUSY" output
turns off after the function is canceled. Consequently, the signal is not output during this
start-up period until the motor rotation stabilizes. To use the motor lock function, it is
recommended to assign both "LOCK BUSY" and "TRG BUSY" to the output terminals.
Timing diagram (Output terminal operation when the motor lock input is used)
IN2 ON
(motor lock)
OUT1 ON
(LOCK BUSY
LOCK BUSY TRG BUSY
TRG BUSY)
3-18
3-6 Scan Count Setting Function
This section describes the scan count setting function of the BL-1300 Series.
Outline of the scan count setting function
Users can change the number of laser scans emitted by the BL-1300 Series in one second. Change
the number of scans to allow the BL-1300 Series to follow the movement of fast production lines.
3

Scan count setting range
The scan count of the BL-1300 Series can be set within a range from 500 to 1300 scans (Unit: 100
scans). Users can change the setting with AutoID Navigator or the setting command. The factory-
default setting is 500 scans.
Setting with AutoID Navigator

[Operation setting] "Scan count"
AutoID Navigator offers the following options:
500 scans
700 scans
1000 scans
1300 scans
Setting with the setting command

Command WPB0nnnn nnnn = 500 to 1300 (Unit: 100 scans)
Response OK
* Users can use the setting command to specify the scan count which cannot be selected with
AutoID Navigator.
The scan count specified with the setting command can be read with the AutoID Navigator.
TIP When the scan count is set to 800 with the setting command
The current value can also be selected as the drop-down
option for the scan count. The setting shown in the figure is
retained even after the setting file is saved. It can also be
used for several BL-1300 Series units.
Note By increasing the scan count, the response to moving is improved, however, some features
may deteriorate such as the minimum resolution, reading depth, and reading stability for
barcodes with many digits.
Specify the scan count by considering the following points:
:Minimum narrow bar width
:Number of characters in the barcode
(These points are important for CODE128, GS1-128, and GS1 Databar in particular.)
Reading distance
Before starting actual operation, be sure to test the operation thoroughly.
Normally, it is recommended to set the BL-1300 Series to 500 scans per second.
3-19
3-7 Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) Addition Function
This section describes the preventive maintenance information (PMI) addition function of the BL-1300
Series.
Outline of the PMI function

3 PMI (Preventive Maintenance Information) is additional data which indicates the decrease in the bar
code reading reliability due to a low printing quality or a dirty transmitter/receiver of the BL-1300
Series. Add the PMI to read data so that proper preventive measures may be take before problems
arise.
PMI assessment criteria
The BL-1300 Series assesses the PMI in four levels by calculating the multiplier for the scan count
between laser emission start and reading completion with reference to the specified decoding match
count.
ON
Trigger input
ON
Laser beam
Scan count between laser emission

start and reading completion
The BL-1300 Series calculates the PMI as follows.

The assessment consists of two reference values: Preset value 1 (L1) and Preset value 2 (L2).
* Be sure to set L2 larger than L1.
PMI Calculation formula Assessment

(Scan count)
0
(Decoding match
L1 Normal
(Scan count)
1 L1 < L2 Caution
(Decoding match
(Scan count)
2 L2< Warning
(Decoding match
9 Read error Read error
Note The scan count includes scans that are not applied to a bar code. If many scans are not
applied to a bar code, such as when a raster-scan type reader is used, you need to increase
the preset values (L1 and L2).
Set the values to satisfy the both conditions: L1<L2 and L10.
If users select to add decode count to the read data, the PMI is not added.
If the decoding match count is set to a value larger than 100, the assessment result is
always 0.
3-20
3-7 Preventive Maintenance Information (PMI) Addition Function
Output data format
When the PMI is added, the read data is output in the following format.
Read data : PMI

PMI = 0 : Normal
1 : Caution
3
2 : Warning

9 : Read error
The separation character ":" can be changed as desired. (1 character max.)
Setting the PMI preset values
First, run the reading ratio test mode. Then, check the result and the following table to determine the
preset values. A reading ratio of less than 20% is not included.
Reading ratio Preset value 1 Preset value 2

20% to 39% 6 12
40% to 59% 5 10
60% to 79% 4 8
80% to 100% 3 6
Conditions for effective PMI

To use the PMI effectively, use the function under the following conditions:
Set the BL-1300 Series so that it emits the laser beam after the bar code has completely entered in
the field of the laser beam.
If the BL-1300 Series emits the laser beam before the bar code enters the laser beam field, it starts
counting scans with no bar code, resulting in inaccurate PMI.
Use this function for stationary or slowly moving bar codes.
If the bar code moves fast, the scan count for the bar code decreases, resulting in inaccurate PMI.
Use the function when the number of decoding successes is at least 20 in the tact measurement
test mode ( Page 3-8).
Useful examples of PMI applications

z Controlling the printing quality of bar codes
Monitor the PMI constantly. If the PMI value is degraded, the printing quality of the bar code may
have a problem. Inspect the bar code.
z Preventing problems before they happen
When using several BL-1300 Series units, monitor the PMI of all the units constantly.
If the PMI value for a specific unit is degraded
The unit may have a problem, such as a dirty transmitter/receiver.

If the PMI value for a specific bar code label is degraded
The printing quality of the barcode may have begun to degrade.

As shown above, PMI allows you to identify problems. You can take appropriate action before a read
error actually occurs.
3-21
3-8 Silent Mode
This section describes the silent mode of the BL-1300 Series.
Outline of the silent mode
3 A typical bar code reader outputs read data when it reads a bar code successfully, and outputs a
read error code when it fails to read.
With the BL-1300 Series, you can control data transmission so that the result data will not be sent to
the host.
This function is useful as a bar code check sensor which outputs an OK signal for successful reading
and an ERROR signal for reading failure. When using the preset/verify function; users can choose to
output information only when verification data does not match and then users can collect this data for
troubleshooting the verification error.
Furthermore, if you suppress sending all of the data, the data transmission time is eliminated and the
host does not need to check data, so that users can save the tact time for entire bar code reading
operations.
TIP Silent mode is intended to suppress sending the result data of the BL-1300 Series. It does
not suppress the sending of output signals from the OUT terminal assigned with OK/NG/
ERROR or other BUSY signals.
Use this function when you need to control I/O operation.
Timing diagram (When data for OK/NG/ERROR is suppressed)

Read successful Read failed
Trigger input
Bar code
Laser beam
Data
communication
OK/NG/ERROR OK/NG ERROR

output
BUSY output
As the diagram shows, only the read data is not sent and the OUT terminals operate normally.
3-22
3-8 Silent Mode
Setting procedure of silent mode
Set the silent mode with AutoID Navigator or the setting command.
Setting screen of AutoID Navigator

3

Setting command
Command WPE8nn nn = 0 to 63 (Select the output to suppress data.)
Response OK
Data which is not sent in the silent mode
By setting the BL-1300 Series, you can suppress the following data transmission.
Item and operation set with AutoID Navigator
Setting item Data not to be output

Read data
OK
Read data for which the verification against the preset data was OK
Preset verification NG data
NG
Read data for which the verification against the preset data was NG
ERROR Read error data
TEST mode Test mode output data
3-23
3-8 Silent Mode
Item and operation setting command (Command: WPE8nn)
Setting item Data not to be output

nn = 1 Read data, read data when verification was OK
nn = 2 Read data when verification was NG
3 nn = 4
nn = 8
Read error data
Data indicating the Auto-trigger setting completion (WTEACHOK)
The following data for preset data registration:

Data indicating successful reading
nn = 16
Data showing reading failure
Invalid registration data
nn = 32 Test mode data
TIP To suppress the output of several kinds of data, specify the sum of the nn values above with
the setting command.
Example 1: To suppress the output of the read data (nn = 1) and test mode data (nn = 32)
Command: WPE833 (nn = 1 + 32)
Example 2: To suppress the output of all data
Command: WPE863 (nn = 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32)
Note If you set silent mode from AutoID Navigator, the output is not suppressed for the data
indicating successful reading and data showing reading failure during preset data
registration. If you want to suppress the output of such data, you must use command
WPE8nn to set the silent mode.
3-24
3-9 AGC/Parameter Bank Mode
The BL-1300 Series provides a function to switch between the AGC (Auto Gain Control) mode and
the parameter bank mode in order to improve bar code reading ability.
Moreover, the parameter bank mode includes the alternate function, which conducts reading by
changing the parameter banks specified beforehand.
This section explains the AGC mode and parameter bank mode.
3

AGC mode
Outline of the AGC (Auto Gain Control) mode
The AGC (Auto Gain Control) mode obtains the received light waveform when the laser beam scans
a target bar code, and adjusts it to the waveform to ensure stable reading.
If the distance to the bar code label is too long, or if the reading angle is too large, the BL-1300 Series
receives smaller quantity of reflection, which makes the amplitude of the received light waveform
smaller. If the distance to the bar code label is too short, or if the reading angle is too close to the
specular reflection region, the BL-1300 Series receives a larger quantity of reflected light, which
makes the amplitude of the received light waveform larger.
The AGC mode automatically performs adjustment for such cases by increasing the amplitude of
small received light waveforms, or decreasing the amplitude of large waveforms.
Long reading distance

Large reading angle
Increase the amplitude.
Received light waveform adjusted
for easier reading
Short reading distance

Reading angle close to specular
reflection region
Decrease the amplitude.
* By default, the AGC mode is selected.

Normally do not change the setting from the AGC mode.
Note In the AGC mode, the BL-1300 Series starts reading with the gain adjusted for the focal
distance from the first scan.
If a target is not positioned near the focal distance, the BL-1300 Series requires 3 scans at
maximum to adjust the gain.
3-25
Parameter bank mode
Outline of the parameter bank mode
3 Unlike the AGC mode, the parameter bank mode does not adjust the gain of the received light
waveform. Bar codes are read using predefined parameters.
If the BL-1300 Series cannot read a bar code because the bar code was printed with low accuracy or
because the contrast between the bars and the spaces is low, users can use the parameter bank
mode to adjust parameters according to the bar code.
Setting the parameter bank
To set the parameter bank, use AutoID Navigator to perform teaching by reading the actual bar code.
3-26
Users can also use the parameter bank after teaching to check whether the BL-1300 Series can read
the bar code under different conditions (distance, reading angle, etc.)

* For details of the procedure, refer to "4-9 Parameter Bank Tuning" (Page 4-43).
Note The parameter bank mode is not a function that ensures reading of any bar codes. Be sure
to perform reading tests thoroughly before using it in actual operation.
Moreover, it is highly possible that the bar code labels which can be read only in the
parameter bank mode cannot be read with normal bar code readers. In actual operation,
consider the performance of not only the BL-1300 Series but also the other bar code readers
used on the site.
3-27
Alternate function
The parameter bank mode offers eight teaching banks. The alternate function enables reading by
changing the predefined parameter banks one by one, with teaching performed for each parameter
3 bank.
When the alternate function is used, the registered parameter banks are automatically changed from
bank 1 to find optimum parameter settings to read a bar code.
Operation flow of the alternate function

This flow chart explains the operation of the alternate function.
Start reading
Parameter bank
selection
Read a bar code
Was the read

successful?
YES
NO
Is the trigger
input off?
YES
NO
Reading finishes
Was the scan

count for parameter
change reached?
YES
NO
* The parameter banks are selected from bank 1 in ascending order.
Note When the alternate function is enabled, the BL-1300 Series always starts reading
beginning with bank 1 every time it recognizes the trigger input.
Since the alternate function continues reading by changing the parameter banks one by
one, it requires longer time before selecting the parameter bank with optimum settings.
(The required time varies depending on the specified scan count for parameter change.)
3-28
3-10 Bar Code Position Detection Function
This section describes the bar code position detection function.
Outline of the bar code position detection function
The bar code position detection function detects the right and left ends of a target bar code. The
position data of both ends is then added to the read data and output. By specifying reference
3

positions for the right and the left end, you can also use this function to turn on the output terminal
when a bar code is read outside of the specified range.
This function is useful to check the relationship between the laser beam field and bar code label
position for installation of the BL-1300 Series. Or, you can use it during actual operation to obtain
outputs for inspection when a bar code is read outside of the expected reading position.
Reference positions Reference positions

at both ends at both ends
Reading a bar code in the proper position OUT terminal (POSITION) turns on
Output format of position data

The bar code position data is output in the following format:
Left Right
Header Read data : / Terminator
end end
Setting the OUT terminal

By assigning "POSITION" to one of the output terminals, the assigned OUTn (n = 1 to 4) terminal turns
on when a bar code exceeds the range between the specified ends.
( "3-5 Multi-I/O Function" (Page 3-15), "4-4 Setting procedure" (Page 4-9)
* For details of the bar code position, refer to "9 Concept of Bar Code Position" (Page A-23).
3-29
3-11 Bar Code Composition Function
This section describes the bar code composition function of the BL-1300 Series.
Bar code composition
3 Normally, a bar code is read when the laser beam of a bar code reader scans it entirely including the
quiet zones as shown below.
Quiet zones
If part of a bar code is flawed, dirty, or if a bar code label is placed at an angle, the bar code reader
fails reading.
Lack of print Slanted
The bar code composition function allows the BL-1300 Series to recognize and read even these bar
codes.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
A bar code is scanned at two positions, (1) and (2), to compose a complete bar code data which the
BL-1300 Series can recognize correctly to output the read data.
3-30
Setting the bar code composition function
The bar code composition function is set with AutoID Navigator.

On the "Bar code setting" tab, click the
Details button to display the screen shown
on the left.
(This screen shows the case where CODE39
is registered.)
Check "Composit bar" and send the setting to the BL-1300 Series, and the bar code composition
function is enabled.
Requirement for the bar code composition
The following requirements must be satisfied to use the bar code composition.
Bar code type requirement

Applicable bar codes are as follows:
UPC/EAN (excluding UPC-E)
CODE39
CODE128
CODABAR
ITF (with check digit)
CODE93
Note The bar code composition cannot be used for ITF codes with no check digits added.
To use the bar code composition for CODE39 or CODA BAR, it is recommended to use
bar codes with check digits added to prevent erroneous reading.
Setting requirements
Specify the same value to the minimum and maximum value of the code length.
Bar code composition is possible for only one bar code type.
If you enable the bar code composition function for 10-digit CODE128, you cannot use the function
for other bar code types including CODE128 of other number of digits.
3-31
Read operation requirements

Data used for the bar code composition must include either of the start or stop characters. The bar
code composition may fail when the bar code label is too slanted.
3 (1) : *ABCD1
(2) : BCD12345
(1)
(3) : 3456*
(2) When the BL-1300 Series recognizes the data pieces
above, data (2) is not used for the bar code composition.
(3) The combination of data (1) and (3) does not make
"*ABCD123456*". Consequently, the bar code
composition fails.
As for bar code type UPC/EAN, the bar code composition fails unless the laser beam shines on the
section from the left guard bar to the center bar and the section from the center bar to the right
guard bar.
The laser beam must shine on the

center bar.
4 912345 467898
Left guard bar Right guard bar

Center bar
To determine the data used for the bar code composition, you need data obtained with the
specified decode match count.
Consequently, when the decode match count is 2, at least four scans are required to determine the
data for composition: Two for the data including a start character, and two for the data including a
stop character.
Note The bar code composition may result in an unstable reading depending on the condition of
bar code labels or usage.
For bar codes containing no check digits, incorrect data may be used for the composition,
resulting in erroneous reading. Thoroughly test the function before using it in actual
operation.
3-32
3-12 Quick Setup Bar Code
This section describes the quick setup bar code.
Quick setup bar code
Users can print the settings specified with AutoID Navigator as a bar code, and read the code with
the BL-1300 Series to change its settings all at once.
3

The quick setup bar code can be printed by using the quick setup bar code print function of the
AutoID Navigator.
Since the setting of the BL-1300 Series can be changed by just reading the bar code, you can
change the setting even at a location where a PC cannot be used.
Printout sample
* The number of bar codes to be printed varies depending on the setting.

* When reading the quick setup bar code, you must start reading from bar code No. 1.
3-33
Reading the quick setup bar code
The quick setup bar code can be read by any of the following methods.
3 Pressing the TEST button

Press the TEST button of the BL-1300 Series to read the quick setup bar code. The procedure is as
follows:
1 Hold down the TEST button of the BL-1300 Series for 9 seconds.
After the laser beam flashes twice, release the switch, and the laser beam continues to emit.
2 Read the quick setup bar codes from No. 1 in ascending order.
The STABILITY LEDs illuminate to indicate the bar code reading status.
3 When all bar codes are read, the OK/NG/ERR LED of the BL-1300 Series illuminates in green.
4 Press the TEST button once briefly, and the quick setup bar code reading mode finishes.
* While the quick setup bar code is being read, the MODE BUSY output turns on.
Using the external input

Assign the read quick setup bar code function to the IN terminal of the BL-1300 Series and use the
external input signal to read the quick setup bar code.
1 Turn on the IN terminal to which the read quick setup bar code function is assigned.
While the input signal turns on, the laser beam continues to emit.
4 Turn off the input signal, and the quick setup bar code reading mode finishes.
* While the quick setup bar code is being read, the MODE BUSY output turns on.
3-34
Using the setting commands

Send the setting commands to read the quick setup bar code.
1 Send the shift to the setting mode command.

Command
Response
: SSET
: OK
3

2 Send the start quick setup bar code reading command.
Command : RCON
Response : OK
When the BL-1300 Series receives RCON, the laser beam continues to emit.
5 Quit the quick setup bar code reading mode.

Command : RCOFF
Response : OK
6 Save the setting in the memory of the BL-1300 Series.

Command : SAVE
Response : OK
7 Quit the setting mode.

Command : SEND
Response : OK
Note When you read the quick setup bar code by sending commands, you need to save the
setting in the memory by sending the SAVE command before quitting the setting mode.
If you do not send the SAVE command, the settings will be discarded after the setting mode
is has been exited and the BL-1300 Series is turned off.
3-35
MEMO
3
3-36
4
AutoID Navigator Operation
This chapter describes how to use AutoID Navigator to set and operate the
BL-1300 Series.
For more details about the software, refer to the "AutoID Navigator User's
Manual".
4-1 Installing, starting, and quitting AutoID Navigator ..4-2

4-2 Screen Layout .........................................................4-6
4-3 Operating AutoID Navigator....................................4-8
4-4 Setting procedure....................................................4-9
4-5 Sending/receiving settings....................................4-29
4-6 Saving/reading a setting file..................................4-32
4-7 Quick setup barcode.............................................4-34
4-8 Terminal and test mode .........................................4-36
4-9 Parameter Bank Tuning .........................................4-43
4-1
4-1 Installing, starting, and quitting AutoID Navigator
PC environment
Before starting installation, confirm that your PC satisfies the following requirements for the operating
environment and hard disk free space.
Operating environment
4 The following environment is required to operate the AutoID system integration/configuration software
AutoID Navigator.
Confirm that your system satisfies the following conditions and that you have all of the required
devices.
Item Description
Windows 8 (excluding Windows RT)
Windows 7 (32bit/64bit)
OS
Windows Vista (32bit)
Windows XP (32bit)
DVD-ROM drive Required for installation
Port/Connector D-Sub 9-pin RS-232C port or USB port
Other .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 or later has been installed.
Treadmarks
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation of America.
4-2
Installation procedure
This section assumes AutoID Navigator will be installed on a Windows XP-based computer with the
following drive configuration.
Drive C : Hard disk drive
Drive E : DVD-ROM drive

4

Note
To install AutoID Navigator, you need to log on as a user with the privileges to change the
system, such as Administrator or Computer Administrator.
Quit all active applications before starting the installation. The installation may take longer
if antivirus software or other applications are active on the computer.
2 Insert the "AutoID Navigator Master Disk" into the DVD-ROM drive of the PC.
3 Use Explorer to open the DVD-ROM drive, and double-click "E:\japanese\Setup_jp.exe".

The [Welcome to the AutoID Navigator
(en) Setup Wizard] window appears.
4 Click the Next button.

The [Select Installation Folder] window
appears.
To change the destination, click the
Browse button and select a destination
folder.
4-3

The [Select Program Folder] window appears.
6 Click to the Next button.

The [Confirm Instllation] window
appears.
4

The [Installation Complete] window
appears. Click the [Close].
This completes the installation of AutoID
Navigator.
4-4
Starting procedure
Start AutoID Navigator.
1 From the Start menu, select [Programs][KEYENCE Applications][AutoID Navigator].

Or, double-click on the desktop.
AutoID Navigator starts.
4

Quitting procedure
Quit AutoID Navigator.
1 Click the button at the right end of the title bar.

Or, press the + keys.
AutoID Navigator will close.
: Display of the icon during connection updates

: No connection has been established.
: The connection has been established successfully to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410,
or NX-50 Series.
: The attempt to connect to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series failed.
: The model of the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series is different.
: The connection has been established successfully to the device registered immediately under
"DefaultProject".
: The attempt to connect to the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject" failed.
4-5
4-2 Screen Layout
This section describes the icons and views for AutoID Navigator.
AutoID Navigator screen
Menu icons
4
Project view
"System configuration"
"File configuration"
Menu icons
Icon Name Function
New project Create a new project.
Open a project file Open a saved project file.
Save a project file Save the setting changes for the project file.
Option Specify the communication parameters of the PC.
Connection update Connect/reconnect to the BL-1300 Series.
4-6
4-2 Screen Layout
Project view
The Project view is displayed in two forms: "System configuration" shows the hierarchy of the devices
registered with the current project; and "File configuration" shows the setting files for the devices
grouped based on their types.
"System configuration" and "File configuration" can be changed in the following manner.
4

Click and select a desired configuration from the list.
System configuration
Displays the system configuration information which represents the manufacturing line.
File configuration
Displays the system configuration files of the project and the setting files of each device.
Select a model under Parameter and specify reading operations (parameters).
You can print the contents of a file by selecting the file and clicking the Print button.
4-7
4-3 Operating AutoID Navigator
Operation flow
The basic operation flow of AutoID Navigator is as follows.
Use the Project view or Unit view to select the "BL-1300 Series".
1
4
Set the operation of the BL-1300 Series.
2
Page 4-10
Send the settings to the BL-1300 Series.

3 Page 4-30
Perform a reading test.

4 Page 4-41
Save/print the settings as necessary.

5 Page 4-32
Quit AutoID Navigator.

6
4-8
4-4 Setting procedure
This section describes the procedure to set up the BL-1300 Series with AutoID Navigator.
Operation parameter setting
Display the "Param" setting screen and specify the operation parameters of the BL-1300 Series.
In the Project view, select the BL-1300 Series in "System configuration".
In Unit view, select the BL-1300 Series. 4
The parameters specified in this screen can be sent to the BL-1300 Series.

Screen displayed from the Project view
Button has been selected. The name of the setting file is displayed.
The connection
status with the
BL-1300 Series is
indicated.
For the connection

procedure,
refer to Page 4-29.
4-9
Operation setting
Specify the label read mode, trigger input, and other operation details.
1 2
4
3 4
5 7
8
10
1 Read mode
Select one of the following options.
Single, Multi 1, Multi 2, Multi 3, Custom
* When you select "Custom", youll need to select the Custom button to configure the read
settings.
Refer to "Advanced reading setting" (Page 4-25).
2 Additional information
Check the item(s) to add to the read data sent to the PC.
3 Data-send timing (in single label read mode)
Select the timing to send the read data.
After read
At trigger OFF
When "Multi 1", "Multi 2", or "Custom" is selected for "Read mode", "Repeat-reading interval" is
displayed instead of this option.
Setting range : 10 to 99990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)

Initial value : 1000 ms
4-10
4 Decoding match count

Increasing the "Decoding match count" improves reading reliability, however, the reading becomes
slower. Specifying "1" may increase the risk of outputting misread data. Specify a value of "2" or
higher under normal conditions.
Setting range : 1 to 255
Initial value :2
5 Scan Speed
Specify the number of scans to be made in one second.
4
Setting range : 500, 700, 1000, and 1300

Initial value : 500
Note
When you set the Scan Speed using a serial command, you can specify any value between
500 and 1300 in the multiples of 100. Consequently, after you specify a value with a serial
command and then receive the setting with AutoID Navigator, the value is displayed in the
field even though it was not in the original options. In this case, the value is also added to
the drop-down list options.
When you set "800" using serial commands and then

read the settings with AutoID Navigator
6 Scan parameter control

Specify the reading conditions of the BL-1300 Series.
Setting option : AGC or Bank Mode
Initial value : AGC
When you select bank mode, click the Setting button and specify a parameter bank.
Refer to "3-9 AGC/Parameter Bank Mode" (Page 3-25)
Refer to "Parameter bank setting" (Page 4-27)
7 Read error
Specify a character string to be sent when the BL-1300 Series fails to read a barcode.
Setting range : 8 characters max. (16 HEX characters max.)
When this option is left empty, no error code will be sent.
Initial value : ERROR (4552524F52h)
4-11
Trigger Setup
Clicking the Trigger Setup button displays the following items.
8 Signal type
Select one of the following three options.
Level
Barcodes are read between the instant when the trigger input turns on and the instant when the
4 trigger input turns off.

One-shot
When the timing input turns on, barcodes are read for the time specified for "One-shot input
time".
One-shot input time
Setting range :10 to 99990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Initial value :1000 ms
Auto trigger
Instead of timing inputs, Auto-trigger mode is used for reading barcodes. When a target is
detected, barcodes are read for the time specified for "One-shot input time".
Trigger scan count: Specify the scan interval to detect the target.
Setting range : 8 to 248 scans
Initial value : 8 scans
Trigger Interval: Specify the time to start scanning to detect the next target.
Setting range : 10 to 99990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
9 Test mode initiated upon power-up
Select a test mode to start at power-on, if necessary.
"Disable", "Reading-rate check", "Tact check", "Position check"
10 Cmd for trigger ON, Cmd for trigger OFF
Specify command characters used for turning the timing input on/off with command transmission.
Setting range : 8 characters max. (16 HEX characters max.)
Initial value : Command for timing ON = LON (4C4F4Eh)
Command for timing OFF = LOFF (4C4F4646h)
4-12
Barcode setting
Specify the type of barcode to read.

Up to 8 types of barcodes can be registered with Code 1 through Code 8.
1
2
4

3
4
1 Barcode type selection

The following barcode types can be selected.
CODE39
ITF
2 of 5
NW-7/Codabar
UPC/EAN/JAN
CODE128
CODE93
COOP2of5
GS1 DataBar
None
2 Code length
Specify the maximum and minimum number of digits that will be read from the barcode. To
change the displayed value, click the Edit button and change the value on the displayed screen.
The maximum/minimum number of digits vary depending on

the barcode type.
Enter values for "Max" and "Min", and then click the OK button
to apply the change.
4-13
3 Detail
If you want to specify detailed read conditions for the barcodes, click the Detail button and set the
condition on the displayed screen.
The available conditions vary depending on the barcode type.
Select the condition and click the OK button, and the condition is changed.
4 Options
4 By clicking the Options button, you can specify the "Max code length output" and "Specify label
orientation" functions.
Max code length output

This function allows the BL-1300 Series to output only the designated digits of the read barcode
data.
Direction : Not used (Initial value), Forward, Reverse
Effective and Starting:
Specify the number of digits to be selected (effective digits) and the digit at which
to begin selection (starting digit). The setting range for effective and starting varies depending
on the barcode type and maximum/minimum number of digits setting.
For example, when the read data is "49123456", the output data changes as follows depending
on the setting.
<Example 1> <Example 2>
Direction : Forward Direction : Reverse
Effective :5 Effective :5
Starting :2 Starting :2
Second digit Second to last digit
4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
Effective 5 digits Effective 5 digits
Specify label orientation

You can select the direction (orientation) for the barcode label to be read. This function is useful
when you need to check the orientation of barcode labels.
Not used, Forward, Reverse
* Forward is the orientation when the BL-1300 Series starts scanning from the start character
side of a barcode.
* Reverse is the orientation when the BL-1300 Series starts scanning from the stop character
side of a barcode.
4-14
Range of the maximum and minimum number of digits
The table below shows the maximum and minimum number of digits available for each barcode type.
Barcode type Maximum number of digits Minimum number of digits

CODE39 3 to 74 3 to 74
ITF 2 to 74 2 to 74
2of5
NW-7/Codabar
1 to 74
3 to 74
1 to 74
3 to 74
4
1 to 148 1 to 148

CODE128
CODE93 1 to 74 1 to 74
COOP2of5 1 to 74 1 to 74
GS1 DataBar 1 to 74 1 to 74
* The values for CODE39 and NW-7/Codabar include start/stop characters.
* The values for CODE128 are the maximum values when start code C is used.
* For ITF, only even numbers can be specified.
Detailed setting for each barcode type
You can specify detailed conditions for each barcode type.

The displayed screen varies depending on the barcode type.
Detailed setting for CODE39
Send start/stop character

Check this option to send the read data including the start/stop characters (*).
Inspect check-digit [Modulus 43]
Select this option to validate the check digit. When this option is checked, "Send check digit" is
displayed.
Send check digit
Check this option to send the read data including the check digit.
Composite bar
Check this option to use the barcode composition function.
4-15
Detailed setting for ITF
4
Inspect check-digit (Modulus 10/3)

Select this option to validate the check digit. When this option is checked, "Send check-digit" is
displayed.
Send check-digit
Composite bar
Detailed setting for 2of5
support Industrial 2of5

Check this option to read Industrial 2of5 barcodes.
support Standard 2of5
Check this option to read Standard 2of5 barcodes.
4-16
Detailed setting for NW-7/Codabar

Start/stop characters
Select whether to send the read data including the start/stop characters. You can also select the
case of the start/stop characters.
Inspect check-digit
Select this option to validate the check digit. When this option is checked, "Send check-digit" and
"Check-digit type" is displayed.
Send check-digit
Check-digit type
Select the type of check digit.
Composite bar
4-17
Detailed setting for UPC/EAN/JAN
4
EAN (JAN)13: Check this option to read 13-digit JAN.

EAN (JAN): Check this option to read 8-digit JAN.
UPC-E: Check this option to read UPC-E.
Number of output digits of UPC-A
Select whether to use a 13-digit or a 12-digit output when reading UPC-A data.
Add "0" to UPC-E system code
Check this option to add "0" to the beginning of the read data.
GTIN 14 digits output
Check this option to add "0" to the beginning of the read data to output 14-digit data.
Composite bar
support GS1-128(EAN-128)
Check this option to support GS1-128 (EAN-128).
The BL-1300 Series uses [GS] (1Dh) to output [FNC1] which indicates the separation for variable
length.
Composite bar
4-18

Composite bar
Detailed setting for GS1 DataBar
You can specify the type of GS1 DataBar code to read.

support GS1 DataBar (Truncated)
Check this option to read GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Truncated.
support GS1 DataBar Stacked (Omnidirectional)
Check this option to read GS1 DataBar Stacked and GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional.
support GS1 DataBar Limited
Check this option to read GS1 DataBar Limited.
support GS1 DataBar Expanded
Check this option to read GS1 DataBar Expanded.
support GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
Check this option to read GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked.
Read reverse barcode
Select the option to read a reverse bar code of GS1 DataBar.
4-19
Port setting
Specify the communication parameters of the BL-1300 Series.
4 1
2 3
1 RS-232C communication parameters

Select the communication parameters according to the settings of the external device to be
connected.
Baud rate
Setting value : 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 31250, 38400, 57600,
115200 bits/s
Initial value : 9600 bits/s
Parity
Setting value : None, Even, Odd
Initial value : Even
Data bits
Setting value : 7 bits, 8 bits
Initial value : 7 bits
Stop bit
Setting value : 1 bit, 2 bits
Initial value : 1 bit
2 Multi-drop selection
To connect the BL-1300 Series to the N-410, select "Enable" and specify "ID (1 to 31)".
To connect the BL-1300 Series to the NX-50RS, select "Disable".
3 RTS/CTS protocol settings
Specify whether to enable or disable RTS/CTS protocol.
When connecting the BL-1300 Series to the N-UB or N-L1, "Enable" must be selected.
4-20
4 PLC link
When you use the PLC link, select "Enable". Selecting "Enable" displays the following screen.

PLC type : MELSEC Series, KEYENCE KV Series,
SYSMAC Series
PLC trigger area : Enable, Disable
DM head address : 0000 to 9900
DM Data Size : 1 Byte/DM, 2 Bytes/DM (High-order to low-order),
2 Bytes/DM (Low-order to high-order)
Station No. (Machine No.) : 0 to 31
5 Character
Partition mark : Specify a character used to separate each additional data item.
Setting value : 1 ASCII character (2 HEX characters)
Initial value : [:] (3Ah)
Inter delimiter : Specify a character used to separate each read data.
Setting value : 5 ASCII characters max. (10 HEX characters max.)
Initial value : [,] (2Ch)
6 Host setup
Specify the format used to send data to the host machine.
Handshaking
Setting value : None, PASS/RTRY, ACK/NAK
Initial value : None
Format length : Select whether to add the number of digits from the send data.
Initial value : Included
Checksum : Select whether to calculate the checksum and add it to the data.
Initial value : Included
Header
Setting value : None, STX, ESC, Custom
When you select "Settings", specify a header using 5 ASCII characters or less.
Initial value : None
Delimeter
Setting value : CR, ETX, CR+LF, Custom
When you select "Custom", specify a terminator using 5 ASCII characters or
less.
Initial value : CR
Send delay time : Specify the time that the BL-1300 Series suspends the response to
the command received from the PC.
Setting value : 0 to 255 ms
4-21
Terminal setting
Specify the options for the multi I/O function of the BL-1300 Series.
4
1 Input terminal
Set the operation of the input terminals (IN1 and IN2).
INn Function (n = 1 or 2)
Function
Setting value : No assignment, Timing, Register preset data, Start test mode, Set Auto-
trigger, Reset PLC link error, Laser lock, Motor lock, Read setup barcodes
Initial value : IN1 = Timing
IN2 = Register preset data
* When you select "TEST", specify the test mode to be started.
Setting value :Reading ratio measurement
Tact measurement
Barcode position measurement
Timing LED
Check this option to let the terminal synchronize with the Timing LED.
Power-on trigger
Check this option to activate the input function specified for INn at power-on.
Input state
Specify the polarity of the input terminal.
Setting value : Norm. open, Norm. colse
Initial value : Norm. open
Input pulse width
Specify the minimum time for which the IN input terminal needs to turn on in order to be
accepted.
Setting value : 2 to 10 ms
4-22
2 Output setting
Set the functions of the output terminals (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4).
OUTn Function (n = 1 to 4)
Setting value : OK, NG, ERROR, PRSET, POSITION, TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY,
ERR BUSY
Initial value : OUT1 = OK
OUT2 = NG + ERROR
OUT3 = ERROR
4

OUT4 = TRG BUSY + LOCK BUSY + MODE BUSY + ERR BUSY
Output duration
Setting value : 10 to 99990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
Note
You cannot set both the result output (OK, NG, ERROR, PRESET, and POSITION) and the
operation output (TRG BUSY, LOCK BUSY, MODE BUSY, and ERR BUSY) to the same
terminal.
4-23
Other settings
Specify the STABILITY LED operation, the verify/preset function, and other optional functions.
4 1
1 Stability LED
Check this option to activate the STABILITY LED to indicate the reading status.
2 Preset data
To use the preset function, register the preset data here.
3 Special settings
Set each option.
Quiet zone scale
Specify the scale factor of the quiet zone (margin) width of the barcode with reference to the
narrow bar width.
Setting value : 4x to 11x
Initial value : 7x
Decode cancel count setting
Do not change from the initial value.
Test button
Specify the function controlled by the test button.
Setting option : TEST, Register preset data, Set Auto-trigger
Initial value : TEST
Output data muting
Specify the output muting operation. Select the condition(s) to disable data output.
Barcode position check
Check this option to perform the barcode position check.
Setting value : 0 to 9999
Initial value : Left pos = 0, Right pos = 9999
4-24
Advanced reading setting
When you click the Advanced setting button for "Read mode" on the [Act setting] tab, the following
screen is displayed. Use this screen to specify operations different from the "Single", "Multi 1" to "Multi
3" options.
4
1 2

3 4
5 6
1 Laser off timing

Specify the timing to turn off the laser.
After read
At trigger-OFF
2 Data decision timing
Specify the timing decoding the barcode data.
After read
At trigger-OFF
3 Data-send timing
Specify the timing to output the barcode data.
After read
At trigger-OFF
4 OK/ERROR priority
Specify the condition to output the barcode data .
OK : If at least one condition is satisfied, "OK" is output at the timing
specified for "Data-send timing".
ERROR : If at least one condition is NOT satisfied, "ERROR" is output at the
timing specified for "Data-send timing".
4-25
5 Data output order

Specify the order to output the barcode data.
by Read : Output the data in the order of reading by the BL-1300 Series.
by Bank : Output data in the order starting from Bank 1.
by Position : Check the position of the barcode reading and output data in the
order starting from the left (the side on which the scanning started).
4 6 Error out timing

Set the timer to send ERROR output and error data when the conditions are not met after the
specified time.
Setting value : 0 to 99990 ms (Unit: 10 ms)

7 Condition bank
Specify the condition used for the judgment of the advanced reading setting.
Check the box of the barcode No. (Code 1 to 8) to read for each condition.
4-26
Parameter bank setting
When you select "Alternate AGC" for "Scan parameter control" and click the Setting button, you can
set the parameter bank options.
4
1

2
1 Default
When this option is checked, the BL-1300 Series uses pre-configured parameter bank settings for
reading.
All banks from Bank 1 to Bank 8 have pre-configured initial values.
2 Bank setting
Specify the details of the individual parameter bank to save the reading parameters.
[Copy] button
Click this button to copy the specified settings to the selected parameter bank.
Bank parameters
Specify the details of the parameter bank.
Active : Check this option to use the setting of the current parameter bank for reading.
Gain : Specify the scale and coefficient of the gain.
Analog gain Setting range : 1x to 128x
Gain Setting range : 0 to 524287
Sensitivity: Specify the sensitivity level.
Setting value : Low, Normal, High, Highest
Initial value : Normal
Sampling rate: Specify the averaging procedures.
Setting value : 1/1, 1/2 (Ave), 1/4 (Ave)
Initial value : 1/1
4-27
Retouch : Select the type of correction used for the obtained bar width data.
Retouch Setting value : None, Enlarge, Reduce, Noise cut
Initial value: None
Retouch parameter Setting range : 0 to 9999
Initial value: 0
3 Scan setting
4 Specify the settings common to all parameter banks.

Scan Speed
Specify the scan speed of the BL-1300 Series.
Setting value : 500, 700, 1000, 1300 scans

Parameter scan count
Specify the scan count after which the parameter bank is changed.
Setting value : 0 to 255 scans
Restart scan count
Specify the scan count to retain before the parameter bank is changed in case reading fails for
the selected parameter bank.
Setting value : 0 to 255 scans
Note
If large values are specified for parameter change scan count and restart scan count, it
takes longer to process one parameter bank.
Moreover, if several parameter banks are specified, the number of switching parameter
banks increases, resulting in a longer time lapse until a proper parameter bank is selected.
To use the parameter bank function, you must check the line speed and other conditions, as
well as thoroughly test the operation.
TIP The parameter bank can be set by using the tuning function.
Refer to "Setting the parameter bank" (Page 4-43).
4-28
4-5 Sending/receiving settings
This section describes how to send/receive settings between AutoID Navigator and the BL-1300
Series.
Connection update between AutoID Navigator and the BL-1300 Series
You need to update the connection with the BL-1300 Series before sending/receiving settings.
4
1

Click the menu icon .
AutoID Navigator starts communication with the connected BL-1300 Series. "Connecting..." is
displayed on the screen.
2 When connection has been established successfully, the display changes as follows.
The Receive setting and Send setting buttons become active.
An icon appears to indicate the established connection.
Project view indicates the established connection
is displayed in the "System configuration" display. changes to .
Display of the icon during connection updates
: No connection has been established.

: The connection has been established successfully to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410,
or NX-50 Series.
: The attempt to connect to the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series failed.
: The model of the device hanging from the N-L1, N-410, or NX-50 Series is different.
: The connection has been established successfully to the device registered immediately under
"DefaultProject".
: The attempt to connect to the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject" failed.
: The model of the device registered immediately under "DefaultProject" is different.
4-29
Sending settings to the BL-1300 Series
Before starting this procedure, confirm that connection with the BL-1300 Series has been established.
( Page 4-29)
4 1 Click the button.

2 Confirm the displayed message and then click the OK button.
"Connecting..." is displayed.
3 When the transmission finishes with the message, "Setting completed", the settings specified
on the individual tabs have been written to the BL-1300 Series.
4-30
Receiving settings from the BL-1300 Series
Before starting this procedure, confirm that connection with the BL-1300 Series has been
established. ( Page 4-29)
1 Click the button.

4

2 Confirm the displayed message and then click the OK button.
"Connecting..." is displayed.
3 When the reception finishes with the message, "Reading completed", the settings of the BL-
1300 Series have been reflected on the tabs of the AutoID Navigator.
4-31
4-6 Saving/reading a setting file
Saving a setting file
You can save the settings specified with AutoID Navigator as a setting file.
1 Click the icon.
4 This operation is disabled when a project is selected in the System configuration display.
2 When the [Save As] dialog box is displayed, enter the file name.
A file name can be specified with 8 characters or less.

The file is saved with the "aic" extension.
3 Click the Save button.

The settings are saved under the specified file name.
TIP You can also save the settings as a project file.

To do so, click the icon.
The project file extension is "ain".
For details of the operation procedure, refer to "AutoID Navigator User's Manual".
4-32
4-6 Saving/reading a setting file
Reading a setting file
1 Click the icon.

This operation is disabled when a project is selected in the System configuration display.

2 When the [Open File] dialog box is displayed, select a file.
3 Click the Open button.

The settings saved in the file are reflected on the corresponding tabs.
TIP You can also read the settings saved in a project file.
To do so, click the icon.
The project file extension is "ain".
For details of the operation procedure, refer to "AutoID Navigator User's Manual".
4-33
4-7 Quick setup barcode
You can print the settings specified with AutoID Navigator as a barcode, and read the code with the
BL-1300 Series to change its settings.
Printing a quick setup barcode
1 Click the icon.
4
2 Enter comments as necessary.
4-34
4-7 Quick setup barcode
3 Click the Print button.
[Printout sample]

Reading a quick setup barcode
Read the printed quick setup barcode by operating the TEST switch of the BL-1300 Series or by
turning ON an input terminal.
TEST Button: "3-1 Basic Operation"
Input terminal:"3-5 Multi-I/O Function"
4-35
4-8 Terminal and test mode
Using the terminal
While the connection with the BL-1300 Series is established, clicking the button
displays the Terminal screen.
You can use this screen to view and check the data read with the BL-1300 Series, or to send
commands to the BL-1300 Series.
4
1 2
3
5 6
1 Target
The currently connected BL-1300 Series is displayed.
2 Full screen
Click this button to maximize the screen.
To resize the maximized screen, click the Minimize button.
3 Edit message
Specify the data format to send commands to the BL-1300 Series.
Select the options according to the settings of the connected device.
Header/delimeter : Select either of None/CR or STX/ETX.
None/CR
Header : None
Delimeter : CR
STX/ETX
Header : STX
Terminator : ETX
Format : "None" is displayed when the BL-1300 Series is connected.
Send command, Check command, Send
Enter a command to be sent to the BL-1300 Series.
4-36
When you enter a command, the [Check command] field shows the command format edited
4
according to the selected header/delimiter and format.
Clicking the Send button sends the command shown in the [Check command] field to the BL-
1300 Series.

Instead of entering a command, you can select one of the previously sent commands from the
pull-down menu.
4 Barcode
LON : Click this option to send the "Trigger input ON" command to the connected BL-1300.
The BL-1300 Series starts reading barcodes.
The send command and read data are displayed in the log display area.
When "Single label read mode" and sending data "After read" are selected, it is not
necessary to click the LOFF button after the reading has finished successfully.
LOFF : Click this option to send the "Timing input OFF" command to the connected BL-1300.
4-37
5 Save log
You can save the commands sent to the BL-1300 Series and the data received from the BL-1300
Series in a log file.
Click the Save log button, and when the [Save as] dialog box is displayed, specify the name of the
4
file to save the log.
[Option] setting
Check "Add" to save the subsequent logs in the same file.
Check "Binary" to save the data in binary format.
Example: Contents of a log file when LON was sent to the BL-1300 Series
* To save a log, you need to click the button before sending a command or receiving data.
6 Clear buffer
Click this button to clear all data displayed in the log display area.
4-38
Sending a command
This section describes the procedure to send a command to the BL-1300 Series.
The procedure to send the "LON" and "LOFF" commands is explained as an example.
1 Confirm that the BL-1300 Series has been connected and then click the button.
For the procedure to confirm the connection, refer to "Connection update between AutoID
4
Navigator and the BL-1300 Series" (Page 4-29).

2 In the Command field, enter "LON" and click the Send button.
Instead of entering a command, you can select one of the previously sent commands from the pull-
down menu.
The log display area shows the log of the specified command.
3 The result BL-1300 Series reading is displayed in the log display area.
4-39
4 To finish reading, enter "LOFF" in the Command field and click the Send button.
4
The log display area shows the log of the sent command.
When log saving is activated, the data displayed in the log display area is also written in a log file.
* When "Single label read mode" and sending data "After read" are set with the BL-1300 Series, it is
unnecessary to send "LOFF" after the barcode was read successfully.
4-40
Using Test Mode
While the connection with the BL-1300 Series is established, clicking the button
displays the Test mode screen.
1
4

2
4 3
5 6
1 Target
Select the BL-1300 Series used for the test. You cannot select a BL-1300 Series which is not
connected.
2 Test mode
Select the test mode from the following three tests.
For details of the test modes, refer to "3-3 Test Mode" (Page 3-7).
Reading rate chek

Tact check
Position check
3 Start/Stop
Click the Start button to start the selected test.
When the test starts, this button changes to the Stop button. To finish the test, click the Stop
button.
4-41
4 Result
The finished test history is listed.
4
According to the test type, the corresponding latest data is displayed outside of the area.
Reading rate
Tact measurement
Barcode position measurement
5 Save csv log

You can save the history of the test in a CSV file.
Example: History file for barcode position tests
6 Clear buffer
Click this button to clear all test result data displayed in the area.
4-42
4-9 Parameter Bank Tuning
After you cancel the AGC read mode, you can specify the parameter bank by operating the BL-1300
Series from the PC.
The tuning from the PC is done on the screen which is displayed by the click of the
button.
This section describes the procedure of the parameter bank tuning.
Setting the parameter bank 4

The [Parameter bank setting] tab allows three types of operation: Manual, Automatic, and Test.
Manual ........... Specify the parameter bank setting options manually. This is the same operation
when you click the Setting button for "Scan parameter control" on the [Act setting]
tab.
Automatic....... Specify the parameter bank setting options by reading a barcode.
Use this procedure under normal conditions.
Test ................ Perform the read test with the specified parameter bank setting.
"Manual" operation options
Clicking the button displays the manual operation options.

The options on this screen are the same as those displayed when you click the Setting button for
"Scan parameter control" on the [Act setting] tab. If any pre-configured setting exists, it is shown on
the display.
For the setting options and procedure, refer to "Parameter bank setting" (Page 4-27).
4-43
"Auto" operation options and setup
Clicking the button changes the screen to display the automatic operation options.
Operate the BL-1300 Series from the PC to directly read barcodes and perform optimum tuning.
4
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Teach graph
The result of the parameter teach is displayed in a graphical form.
2 Graph Clear
Click this button to clear the displayed graph.
3 Graph scale
Select the magnification of the X axis of the graph.
100%
150%
200%
300%
400%
4 Pointer On
Click this button to activate the laser beam emission of the BL-1300 Series and adjust the position
of the barcode.
5 Teach
Click this button to start teaching to ensure optimum tuning.
6 Expert
Use this button if the tuning using the Teach button was not stable.
You can perform tuning with finer adjustment.
4-44
7 before settings
Check this box to perform teaching using the tuning value that had been registered for the
selected parameter bank.
Select this option to use the existing parameter bank setting to check the result of changing the
reading distance, angle, or target barcode label.

Gain value obtained
during the teach
The value can be

changed by dragging.
By using the previous condition, you can display the subsequent four pieces of teaching data
overlaid on the graph. When all of the four data pieces are displayed on the graph, the previous
condition check box is disabled. When you clear the graph, the check box is enabled again.
Since the gain value can be changed by dragging, you can check the status of the overlaid
graphs and find the gain value which allows reading under any conditions.
8 Teach result
The result of teaching is displayed.
9 Result set
When this button is clicked, the result of the teaching is reflected to the parameter bank setting
and the process finishes. Do not forget to click this button to reflect the teaching result to the
parameter bank setting.
* To use more than one parameter bank, perform teaching again after changing the parameter No.
Note
By specifying several parameter banks, you can store different setting conditions in the BL-
1300 Series. Note, however, that this causes the BL-1300 Series to read barcodes by using
all of the specified parameter banks one by one, resulting in a longer time lapse until the
proper parameter bank is selected. Take due consideration of the production line speed and
the time required for obtain read data before using this function.
4-45
"Test" operation options and usage
Clicking the button changes the screen to display the test operation options.
The BL-1300 Series starts test mode operation using the selected parameter bank.
The following two test modes are available.
Reading rate test mode
4 Tact measurement test mode

1 Pointer On
Click this button to activate the laser beam emission of the BL-1300 Series.
2 Start test mode buttons
Click either of the buttons to start the test mode.
4-46
5
Installation
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for the installation of
the BL-1300 Series barcode reader, dedicated communication unit, and
network controller.
5-1 Installing the BL-1300 Series ...................................... 5-2

5-2 Installing the dedicated communication unit.............. 5-8
5-3 Installing the Network Controller............................... 5-11
5-1
5-1 Installing the BL-1300 Series
This section describes the considerations before installing the BL-1300 Series and how to install it.
Considerations before installing the BL-1300 Series
Check the operating environment for the following points before installing the BL-1300 Series.
Avoid extraneous light (sunlight, illumination, photoelectric sensors, etc.)

Avoid extraneous light from entering the transmitter/receiver of the BL-1300 Series. Otherwise, the
5 reading may be unstable or incorrect.
Change the position of the sensor. Remove any extraneous light.

Installation
Countermeasures
Photoelectric sensor
Prevent interruption of the emitted and reflected laser beams

If something interrupts the emitted and/or reflected laser beam, the reading may be unstable.
Bar code
Object which interrupts
the laser beam Countermeasures
Reflected beam
Change the position of the object
to ensure the passage of the laser beam.
Avoid specular reflection

If the laser beam reflects on the bar code at a right angle (specular reflection), the reading may be
unstable or incorrect.
Emitted laser Countermeasures

beam
15
Reflected
laser beam
This angle is essential for proper reading.
* Since the BL-1350HA/1351HA emits a laser beam at an angle of 15, tilting the unit is unnecessary.
(Page 5-4)
5-2
Prevent metal or mirrored surfaces from being in the path of the laser
beam
If a strong light reflected from a metal surface enters the receiver of the BL-1300 Series, the reading
may be unstable or incorrect.
Countermeasures
Installation
Metal surface Cover the metal surface with
black tape to avoid reflection.
Prevent mutual interference when several BL-1300 Series units are used
side-by-side
If the BL-1300 Series receives a reflected laser beam of another BL-1300 Series unit, the reading may
be unstable.
Place a light-shielding plate.

Bar code
Countermeasures
BL-1300 Series BL-1300 Series

Provide sufficient distance
between the units.
5-3
Installing the BL-1300 Series
When installing the BL-1300 Series, adjust the mounting angle and distance as shown below.
Adjusting the mounting angle
Mount the BL-1300 Series so that a laser beam is emitted at an angle of approximately 15.
5 For the front type of the BL-1300 Series BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371, the unit must be
tilted at an angle of 15.
For the side type BL-1350HA/1351HA, it is not necessary to tilt the unit because a laser beam is
Installation
emitted at an angle of 15.
Front type Side type

BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371 BL-1350HA/1351HA
Reading distance
Reading distance
15
15
Adjusting the reading distance
The BL-1300 Series normally provides the most stable reading when it is mounted at the following
distance.
Model Mounting distance
BL-1300/1301 : 120 mm
BL-1300HA/1301HA : 90 mm
BL-1350HA/1351HA : 65 mm
BL-1370/1371 : 230 mm
* The supplied mounting bracket facilitates the angle setting.

* The reading rate check mode ensures an optimal reading position.
Note
Do not mount the BL-1300 Series so that the laser beam is applied to bar codes at a right
angle (10). Otherwise, the specular reflections may cause unstable reading or reading
errors.
Front type Side type
15
Within 10
Within 10
The reading distance and angle may vary depending on the narrow bar width, size, and
printing quality of bar codes. Be sure to test the BL-1300 Series' ability to read the actual
bar codes using "Reading rate check mode".
5-4
Mounting the BL-1300 Series
This section describes how to mount the BL-1300 Series with and without the supplied mounting
brackets.
Mounting the front type unit (BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371)

The following is the procedure for mounting the BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371 with the
supplied mounting bracket.
1 Attach the BL-1300 Series to the mounting bracket.

5
* Refer to Page A-13 for the dimensions of the mounting bracket.
Installation
When mounting bracket A is used When mounting bracket B is used
Mounting
bracket A
Laser
beam
Mounting
bracket B
Laser
beam
Supplied mounting
screw (M3)
Supplied mounting
screw (M3)
2 Fasten the mounting bracket to the unit.

* Mounting screws (M4) are not included.
When mounting bracket A is used When mounting bracket B is used
Mounting screw Mounting screw

(M4) (M4)
Washer
Washer
Insulating
Insulating
spacer
spacer
Note
Be sure to mount the supplied insulation spacer to suppress the influences of electrical noise
from the unit side.
If the insulation spacer is not mounted, electrical noise may be generated causing reading
error or incorrect reading.
5-5
Mounting the side type unit (BL-1350HA/1351HA)

The following is the procedure for mounting the BL-1350HA/1351HA with the supplied mounting
bracket.
1 Attach the BL-1300 Series to the mounting bracket.

* The mounting bracket for the BL-1300 allows two mounting orientations.
Choose the appropriate orientation according to the application.
* Refer to Page A-13 for the dimensions of the mounting bracket.
5 Laser
beam
Installation
Laser
beam
Mounting Mounting
bracket bracket
Supplied mounting Supplied mounting
screw (M3) screw (M3)
2 Fasten the mounting bracket to the unit.

* Mounting screws (M4) are not included.
Mounting screw
(M4)
Washer
Insulating
spacer
Note
Be sure to mount the supplied insulation spacer to suppress the influences of electrical noise
from the unit side.
If the insulation spacer is not mounted, electrical noise may be generated causing reading
error or a incorrect reading.
5-6
Mounting the BL-1300 Series without the supplied mounting bracket

The following is the procedure for mounting the BL-1300 Series directly to the facility without using
the supplied mounting bracket.
1 Fasten the BL-1300 Series.

Fasten the BL-1300 Series in the mounting position with M3 screws.
* The M3 screws are not included. Select the M3 screws after checking the panel thickness and
other factors of the mounting position.
(The mounting hole for the BL-1300 Series is 4 mm deep.)
5
BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA
Installation
1370/1371
Mounting
Mounting hole
hole
Mounting screw (M3) Mounting screw (M3)
Note
To suppress the influence of electrical noise from the unit side, mount the insulation on the
mounting place and the unit side of the BL-1300 Series.
If the insulation is not mounted, electrical noise may be generated causing reading error or a
incorrect reading.
5-7
5-2 Installing the dedicated communication unit
This section describes the procedure for mounting the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 dedicated communication unit.
Precautions
Surrounding space
Install the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 vertically.
When the installation direction changes, provide surrounding space so that heat does not build up.
5
Top
Installation
Bottom
For ventilation, provide a space of 50 mm or more on the top and bottom of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1. As
long as this is the only source of heat generation, the unit can be installed without a space on the
right and left sides.
Provide a space of 80 mm or more in the front of the unit so that the head and other wiring can be
connected.
50 mm or more on the top and bottom; no space is required 80 mm or morefrom the front
on the right and left sides
50 mm
80 mm
50 mm
Installation precautions
When installing the N-R2/R4/UB/L1, do not block the ventilation slots on the top and bottom of the unit.
Otherwise, heat can build up inside the unit, causing product failure.
If the temperature on the bottom of the unit could exceed the upper limit of the operating
temperature (50C), take appropriate measures such as performing forced air cooling or ensuring
proper ventilation by increasing the space from the surroundings so that the temperature does not
exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature (50C).
5-8
Installing the N-R2/R4/UB/L1
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit to the DIN rail
1 Lower the mounting tab on the back of the N-R2/R4/UB/L1.

Check that the mounting tab is placed in the position shown in the following diagram.
Installation
Mounting tab
2 Install the unit to the DIN rail as shown in the figure. Push the mounting tab back into position.
Protrusion
DIN rail
Installing the Dedicated Communication Unit to the DIN rail
Hook
1. Protrusion
DIN rail
2. Push
Mounting tab
* Use a DIN rail that has a thickness of 1.1 mm or less.
5-9
Removing the Dedicated Communication Unit from the DIN rail
1 Lower the mounting tab as shown in B in the following diagram, and then remove the N-R2/R4/UB/L1.
5
Installation
A B
Lower with a screw

driver or another tool.
Mounting tab
2 After the N-R2/R4/UB/L1 is removed, return the mounting tab to the state shown in A.
5-10
5-3 Installing the Network Controller
This section describes the procedure of installing the NX-50 Series network controller.
The NX-50 Series must be attached to a DIN rail.
Precautions
Surrounding space
Install the NX-50 vertically.
When the installation direction changes, provide surrounding space so that heat does not build up.
Top 5
Installation
Bottom
For ventilation, provide space of 50 mm or more on the top and bottom of the NX-50.
As long as this is the only source of heat generation, the unit can be installed without a space on the
right and left sides.
Provide a space of 80 mm or more in the front of the NX-50 so that wiring can be connected.
50 mm or more on the top and bottom; 80 mm or more in the front

no space is required on the right and left sides
50
80
50
Ventilation slots
When installing the NX-50, do not block the ventilation slots on the top and bottom of the unit.
Otherwise, can build up inside the unit, causing product failure.
Ambient temperature
If the temperature on the bottom of the unit could exceed the upper limit of the operating temperature
(+55C), take appropriate measures such as performing forced air cooling or ensuring proper
ventilation by increasing the space from the surroundings so that the temperature does not exceed
the upper limit of the operating temperature (+55C).
5-11
5-3 Installing the Network Controller
Installation/removal procedure
Mounting the NX-50 to the DIN rail
1 Position the NX-50 on the DIN rail.

Hook the DIN rail mounting tab (upper side) to the DIN rail.
5
Installation
DIN rail
DIN rail mounting tab (upper side)
2 Push the unit against the DIN rail until you hear a click.
Locked Lock (setting) is

insufficient.
Removing the NX-50 from the DIN rail
Lower the DIN rail mounting tab, and then pull the unit to the front to remove it from the DIN rail.
5-12
6
Operation of the BL-1300
Series
This chapter describes the read operation of the BL-1300 Series.
6-1 Read Operation .......................................................... 6-2

6-2 Read Modes ............................................................... 6-8
6-3 Custom Reading Setting........................................... 6-13
6-1
6-1 Read Operation
This section describes the signal type and output timing of the BL-1300 Series.
Signal type
There are three methods to trigger the BL-1300 Series to read bar codes: the "Level signal trigger",
"One-shot signal trigger", and "Auto-trigger". You can select an appropriate method according to your
application. Normally, use the "Level signal trigger" method.
The following settings are an example are an example of each trigger method.
Read mode: [Single label read mode]
6 "Single label read mode" (Page 6-8)

Data transmission timing: [After read]
Operation of the BL-1300 Series
"Sending data after a bar code is read" (Page 6-6)

Output terminal setting: OUT1 = OK
OUT2 = NG + ERROR
OUT3 = ERROR
OUT4 = TRG BUSY
The following description refers to these outputs as OK, NG, ERROR, and BUSY respectively.
Refer to "Multi-I/O Function" (Page 3-15).
Level signal trigger
When the trigger input turns on, the BL-1300 Series starts laser emission to read a bar code.
When a bar code is read successfully, it stops laser emission and sends the data.
If the BL-1300 Series fails to read a bar code, it stops laser emission when the trigger input turns off,
and sends a read error.
Timing diagram
<Read successful> <Read failed>
Trigger input
Bar code
Laser emission
Data communication
OK/NG/ERROR output OK/NG ERROR
BUSY output
Set the trigger input so that it stays on long enough for the laser beam to cover the entire bar code.
The laser emission is activated after the trigger input stays on for the specified input time constant.
When the reading is complete, the laser emission stops.
Note The AGC function of the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code with the gain setting adjusted to
the focal length of the first scan.
If the bar code is located at the distance other than the focal length, a maximum of 3 scans
are required to adjust the gain.
6-2
6-1 Read Operation
The data communication time can be obtained using the following equation:
Data length (bits) +
(1: When parity is used) +
Data Start/stop bits (No. of digits of data to be sent +
communication = x
time Baud rate No. of characters of header and terminator)
The ON time for the OK/NG/ERROR output can be changed within the range of 10 to 99990 ms.
Note If a bar code is read at an interval shorter than the specified output ON time, the OK/NG/
ERROR output turns off once even before the specified ON time elapses, and then the next
output signal turns on for the specified ON time. If the same type of the output terminal is
activated successively (e.g. OK -> OK), the previous output signal turns off once for 5 ms
and then the next signal turns on.
6
Refer to "Output terminal operation" (Page 3-17).

The TRG BUSY output turns on for the period between the time the trigger input turns on and the
time a bar code is read or the trigger input turns off.
Important TRG BUSY output

The TRG BUSY output turns on approximately 1.5 seconds after the BL-1300 Series is
turned on, and it stays on for 5 seconds.
Consequently, you need to enter a trigger input or to send a trigger input on command after
the TRG BUSY output turns off.
Approx.
1.5 sec.
BUSY output
5 sec.
Power ON
* Even if the TRG BUSY is not used, trigger input (commands) are not accepted for
approximately 6.5 seconds after the BL-1300 Series is turned on. Control the operation so
that no trigger input signals or commands are sent for at least 6.5 seconds after the BL-
1300 is turned on.
6-3
6-1 Read Operation
One-shot signal trigger
The BL-1300 Series detects when the trigger input turns on, and emits a laser for the specified "one-
shot input time". When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code successfully, it stops laser emission and
sends the data.
The operation from here on is the same as that for the level signal trigger method.
Use the one-shot signal trigger when the trigger input stays on for an extremely short time or when
you want to fix the scanning time.
Timing diagram
6 Trigger input
One-shot input time One-shot input time

Bar code
Laser emission
Data communication
BUSY output
The laser is activated after the trigger input stays on for a specified input time. When the reading is
complete, the laser emission stops.
The input time constant for the trigger input can be changed within the range of 2 to 10 ms.
The one-shot input time can be changed within the range from 10 to 99990 ms.
If the BL-1300 Series fails to read a bar code within the one-shot input time, it stops laser emission
and outputs a read error.
The operation and precautions are the same as those for the level signal trigger method.
Note Trigger input on is recognized after the input stays on for at least the specified input time
constant. Also, trigger input off is recognized after the input stays off for at least the specified
input time.
Consequently, when the line speed is fast and you use fast pulse signals as trigger input
signals, be careful to make pulse signals turn on/off longer than the specified input time
constant.
a a
Trigger input Trigger input

b b
a > b: an OFF trigger signal is not recognized. a b: The ON or OFF trigger signal is
recognized. (a: Input time constant for the trigger input)
6-4
6-1 Read Operation
Auto-trigger
In Auto-trigger mode, the BL-1300 Series starts reading without receiving the external trigger input
signal.
It performs preliminary scans to detect a target, and when the target is recognized, it emits the laser
beam continuously for the specified one-shot input time. After reading the bar code successfully, the
BL-1300 Series stops laser emission and outputs the data. When the specified Auto-trigger resume
time passes, the BL-1300 Series will resume scanning in order to detect the next target.
Timing diagram
6
*1 Auto-trigger resume time
Laser emission
One-shot input time One-shot input time

Target Target Target
(with a bar code) (without a bar code)
Data communication
BUSY output
*1: Target presence detection interval (single scan)
The Auto-trigger scan count can be specified as a multiple of 8 within the range from 8 to 248.
(The Auto-trigger scan count is a specified number of read that must be performed in order to
confirm that the reader detected a target.)
The one-shot input time can be changed within the range from 10 to 99990 ms.
The Auto-trigger resume time can be changed within the range from 10 to 99990 ms.
If the BL-1300 Series fails to read a bar code within the one-shot input time, it stops laser emission
and outputs a read error.
Note In Auto-trigger mode, laser emission is lengthened for the scanner to more easily detect
targets. When the BL-1300 Series detects the change in the reflected light quantity, the
laser emission changes to normal intervals.
Even when no target exists, the laser emission continues at the intervals specified as the
Auto-trigger scan count.
The scan to detect targets automatically checks for differences between the specified
background and the target.
6-5
6-1 Read Operation
Data transmission timing
You can select the timing of the OK/NG/ERROR signal according to the following two options:
After a bar code is read ("After read")
After the trigger input turns off ("After trigger input OFF")
You can select an appropriate timing according to your application. Normally, select "After read".
Sending data after a bar code is read
When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code successfully, it outputs the read data and an OK/NG
6 signal. If it fails to read a bar code, it outputs a read error code and displays the ERROR signal after
the trigger input turns off.
The timing diagram is the same as those shown in the "Signal type" section.
Sending data after the trigger input turns off
When "After trigger input OFF" is selected, the BL-1300 Series outputs the read data and an OK/NG/
ERROR signal after the trigger input turns off. Use this option to output the read data and output
signal at constant timing.
Timing diagram for the level signal trigger method

When the timing input turns off, the read data and an OK/NG/ERROR signal are output.

Trigger input
Bar code
Laser emission
Data communication
BUSY output
When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code successfully, the laser emission stops.
The TRG BUSY output continues until the trigger input signal turns off.
6-6
6-1 Read Operation
Timing diagram for the one-shot signal trigger method

After the specified one-shot input time elapses, the read data and an OK/NG/ERROR signal are
output.
Trigger input One-shot input time One-shot input time
Bar code
Laser emission
Data communication
6
BUSY output

The TRG BUSY output continues until the one-shot input time elapses.
Timing diagram for the Auto-trigger method

Other than scanning for target, detection is the same as that of the one-shot signal trigger method.
The TRG BUSY output continues until the one-shot input time elapses.
The Auto-trigger resume time is starts when the one-shot input time elapses (i.e. the TRG BUSY
signal turns off).
6-7
6-2 Read Modes
The BL-1300 Series is capable of four read modes.
You can select an appropriate mode according to your application. Normally, select "Single label read
mode".
Single label read mode
The single label read mode allows the BL-1300 Series to read only one bar code while one trigger
input turns on.
Timing diagram
6 Trigger input
Bar code
Laser emission
Data communication
BUSY output
*The timing diagram above shows the case for the Level signal trigger to send data After read.
The single label read mode allows selection of data transmission timing from "After read" and "After
trigger input OFF".
Users can select "Level signal trigger", "One-shot signal trigger" and "Auto-trigger".
Multi-label read mode
The multi-label read mode allows the BL-1300 Series

to continuously read several bar codes printed on
one label while one trigger input turns on.
There are three variations according to the output
timing and error judgment.
6-8
6-2 Read Modes
Multi-label read mode 1
In multi-label read mode 1, the BL-1300 Series outputs the data and an OK signal (OK/NG signal
when preset data has been registered) every time a bar code is read. If the BL-1300 Series does not
read a bar code while a trigger input turned on, it outputs a read error code and an ERROR signal
after the trigger input turns off.
Timing diagram
Trigger input Repeat-reading time
Bar code
6
Laser emission

Data communication
OK/NG/ERROR output OK OK OK OK ERROR

/ / / /
NG NG NG NG
BUSY output
The BL-1300 Series continuously reads bar codes according to the following protocol.
Level signal trigger: While the trigger input turns on
One-shot signal trigger/Auto-trigger: During the specified one-shot input time
It is necessary to set the "Repeat-reading time" to prevent the BL-1300 Series from reading the
same bar code twice. If you need to read bar codes containing the same data continuously, adjust
the line speed so that the bar codes pass at intervals longer than the repeat-reading time (Setting
range: 10 to 99990 ms).
Bar codes with different data can be read continuously even during the same period.
Important Repeat-reading time count
The repeat-reading time is counted from the instant when the bar code travels outside of the
laser beam field. If you need to read bar codes containing the same data continuously, adjust
the speed so that the laser beam illuminates the next bar code when the specified repeat-
reading time passes.
Moving direction
Bar code (1) cannot be read because
the laser beam covers both bar codes.
(1) (2)
Moving direction
Adjust the interval so that the bar code
(1) leaves the laser beam field before
bar code (2) is scanned.
(1) (2)
6-9
6-2 Read Modes
In the multi-label read mode 2, the BL-1300 Series continuously reads bar codes while the trigger input is
on. When the trigger input turns off, it outputs all read data simultaneously along with an OK/NG signal.
If the BL-1300 Series does not read a bar code while a trigger input turned on, it outputs a read error
code and an ERROR signal after the trigger input turns off.
Timing diagram
Trigger input Repeat-reading

time
6 Bar code
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Laser emission
Data communication (1) (2) (3) (4)
OK/NG/ERROR output OK ERROR

/
NG
BUSY output
The BL-1300 Series continuously reads bar codes according to the following protocol.
It is necessary to set the "Repeat-reading time" to prevent the BL-1300 Series from reading the
same bar code twice. If you need to read bar codes containing the same data continuously, adjust
the line speed so that the bar codes pass at the intervals longer than the repeat-reading time
(Setting range: 10 to 99990 ms).
Bar codes with different data can be read continuously even during the same period.
If preset data has been registered, even one verification failure causes an NG signal output.
Output data format

The read data is output in the following format:
Header 1st data , 2nd data , 3rd data , ...... , nth data Terminator
The packets of the read data are separated by "," (2Ch: Intermediate delimiter).
The data read from the bar code is first stored in the send buffer of the BL-1300 Series, and is
output when the trigger input turns off.
The send buffer of the BL-1300 Series can store 8,192 bytes.
TIP Send buffer capacity

The send buffer of the BL-1300 Series can store 8,192 bytes excluding a header and a
terminator.
In the multi-label read mode 2, the number of characters which the send buffer can store is
calculated as follows:
Header + Added data + (No. of characters of the 1st data + Intermediate delimiter ) +
(No. of characters of the 2nd data + Intermediate delimiter) + ...
...+ (No. of characters of the n-1th data + Intermediate delimiter ) +
No. of characters of the nth data + Terminator 8,192 bytes
6-10
6-2 Read Modes
In the multi-label read mode 3, the BL-1300 Series will continuously read up to 8 types of bar codes
one by one which are specified in the "Bar code setting" of AutoID Navigator as Code 1 through Code
8 while one trigger input turns on.
If, for example, it reads all of the bar codes specified as Code 1 through Code 8, it sends the read
data at the instant when the trigger input turns off in order from Code 1 to Code 8 along with an OK/
NG signal.
If the BL-1300 Series does not read a bar code during a trigger input signal, or if it does not read a
bar code of the type specified as Code 1 to Code 8, it sends a read error and outputs an ERROR
6
signal after the trigger input turns off.
Timing diagram

Trigger input
Bar code
Code 1 Code 3 Code 5 Code 7

Laser emission
Data communication
OK/NG/ERROR output OK ERROR

/
NG
BUSY output
The BL-1300 Series continuously reads bar codes according to following protocol.
The OK signal is output when the BL-1300 Series reads all of the bar codes specified for "Code 1"
to "Code 8". If preset data has been registered, the OK signal is output when all of the read data is
verified as OK. (You do not have to specify all of the 8 codes. If you specify four bar code types,
the data of the four bar code types is output. If you specify five types, the data of the five types is
output.)
If preset data has been registered, even one verification failure causes an NG signal output.
The ERROR signal is output if the BL-1300 Series fails to read at least one of the specified bar
codes.
Even if several bar codes (8 max.) exist in the laser beam field, the BL-1300 Series can read all of
the bar codes simultaneously.
6-11
6-2 Read Modes
Output data format

The read data is output in the following format:
Data read from Data read from Data read from
Header , , ...... , Terminator
Code 1 Code 2 Code 8
The packets of the read data are separated by "," (2Ch: Intermediate delimiter).
The data read from the bar code is first stored in the send buffer of the BL-1300 Series, and is
output when the trigger input turns off. The send buffer of the BL-1300 Series can store 8,192
bytes.
If the reading fails for any one of "Code 1" to "Code 8", or the corresponding bar code does not
exist, a read error code is sent instead of the read data.
6
Note This mode can be used when "Code 1" to "Code 8" is not specified. You can also specify
the bar code types, skipping code banks for each preset, such as "Code 2", "Code 4", and
"Code 6".
You can specify the same bar code type among "Code 1" to "Code 8", however, you need
to specify different code length settings.
If you need to read bar codes of the same type and the same code length, use the multi-
label read mode 2 or custom setting.
To use the PLC link function, up to 4 packets of output data is stored in the data memory of
the PLC. The 5th and subsequent packets are discarded.
6-12
6-3 Custom Reading Setting
Outline of the custom reading setting
The custom reading setting allows you to create a custom read mode to perform different output
operations from those provided by the single label read mode and multi-label read modes 1 to 3 of
the BL-1300 Series.
For example, you can change the multi-label read mode 1 operation so that an ERROR signal is
output when the BL-1300 Series cannot read a bar code within a certain period, or change the multi-
label read mode 3 operation so that the result is output in the order from successful reading instead
of the order of "Code 1" to "Code 8".
Items of the custom reading setting

6
In the custom reading setting, you can specify the following items.

Laser off timing
Specify the timing to turn off the laser beam of the BL-1300 Series.
Data decision timing
Set the timing to separate the send data.
Data-send timing
Specify the timing to send (output) the determined send data.
OK/ERROR priority
Specify whether an OK or ERROR signal is output when several data packets are sent after the
trigger input turns off.
Data output order
Specify the order to send the determined send data.
Error out timing
Specify a timer to output an ERROR signal if the BL-1300 Series does not read the next bar code
within a certain period after the trigger input turns on or after the previous bar code is read.
Condition bank
Select the bar code setting to be read for Condition 1 to 8.
Up to 8 bar code settings can be selected for one condition.
6-13
TIP Screens showing the items selected for each read mode
Single label read mode
6
6-14

To view the setting of the multi-label read mode, select one of "Multi 1", "Multi 2", or "Multi 3"
on the AutoID Navigator screen and then click the Advanced button.
To view the setting of the single label read mode, select "Single", select "Advanced", and
then click the Advanced button.
It is easier to create a mode by selecting the underlying read mode and then change the
individual items as necessary.
6-15
Read error detection timer
The read error detection timer is a function used to output an ERROR signal when, for example, the
BL-1300 Series cannot read a bar code label within an expected period in the multi-label read mode 1.
The following diagrams show the operation of the read error detection timer.
Timing diagram
1 When the read error detection timer is set for the multi-label read mode 1
Trigger input
Error occurred.
6 Bar code
Preset time
Read error detection

timer Error timer stops.
Output signal OK ERROR OK
2 When the read error detection timer is set for the multi-label read mode 2
Trigger input
Error occurred.
Bar code
Preset time
timer Error timer stops.
Output signal ERROR
The read error detection timer starts counting when the trigger input turns on.
When a bar code is read, the timer is reset and starts counting again from the beginning.
When the timer counts up to the preset time, it does not restart counting until the next successful
reading of a bar code.
Note The read error detection timer is reset when the decoding is complete. Therefore, the timer
is also reset in the following cases:
(1) When the same bar code is read within the repeat-reading time
(2) When the preset data verification results in NG
The read error detection timer is disabled when the add decode count function is used.
6-16
7
Serial Communication
This chapter describes the serial communication of the BL-1300 Series.
7-1 Serial Communication Outline .................................7-2

7-2 Details of data communication................................7-3
7-3 Details of command communication.....................7-11
7-1
7-1 Serial Communication Outline
Serial communication can be used to send data from the BL-1300 Series to a personal computer
(PC), as well as to send operating directions or setting changes from a PC without using the setting
software AutoIDNavigator.
Type of serial communication
Two types of communication are available between the BL-1300 Series and a PC.
Both types use ASCII code ( page A-27) for communication data.
Data communication
The BL-1300 Series reads and sends barcode data to a PC or other compatible devices.
7 Command communication
Commands can be sent from a PC to the BL-1300 Series to change the operational settings.
Serial communication setup
Users must to set communication parameters of the BL-1300 Series and a PC before starting serial
communication.
Setting the BL-1300 Series

Set the following items using AutoID Navigator.
Communication parameters: Baud rate, data length, parity, and stop bit length ( page 7-29)
Communication protocol: ( page 7-3)
Communication data format: Header, terminator ( page 7-5)
Read error code: ( page 7-5)
TIP Apply the same settings to the PC used for the serial communication.
Factory-default communication settings of the BL-1300 Series

The BL-1300 Series is factory-configured with the following communication parameters.
Baud rate : 9600 bits/s
Data length : 7 bits
Parity : Even
Stop bit length : 1 bit
TIP Reset the communication settings to the default values by holding down the switch for
11 seconds or more.
7-2
7-2 Details of data communication
This section describes communication protocols and formats used for data communication.
Communication protocol
The BL-1300 Series supports the following four handshaking protocols (data transfer procedures).
No handshaking
The BL-1300 Series sends data without using any handshaking procedures.
Read data
PASS/RTRY
The BL-1300 Series sends data according to the following steps.
1 The BL-1300 Series sends data to the PC.
Read data
Response
2 The BL-1300 Series waits for a response from the PC (PASS: Transmission successful, RTRY:
Request to resend).
While waiting for a response, the BL-1300 Series can read barcodes. The data read during this
period is stored in the send buffer.
3 The BL-1300 Series receives either of the following responses from the PC.
PASS response: One round of data transmission is complete. (The BL-1300 Series does not reply to
the PASS response.)
RTRY response: The BL-1300 Series will resend the same read data to the PC and wait for the
PASS response.
Note
If the amount of the stored data exceeds the capacity of the send buffer, the BL-1300 Series
performs the following steps and then stops operation:
Sends "OVER" to the PC.
Clears all the data stored in the send buffer.
To resume the operation, send "PASS" from the PC to the BL-1300 Series.
7-3
z PASS/RTRY communication format

PASS CR (RTRY CR ) or STX PASS ETX ( STX RTRY ETX )
* It is also possible to add ESC at the beginning and LF at the end of the format.
Note
The BL-1300 Series can receive commands while it waits for a PASS response. During
this period, the response to a received command (OK, etc.) is sent immediately.
The BL-1300 Series clears all data in the send buffer when it receives a RESET
command while waiting for a PASS response
ACK/NAK
This protocol uses ACK (06h) and NAK (15h) instead of "PASS" and "RTRY" in the PASS/RTRY
7
procedure.
The operation is exactly the same as the PASS/RTRY procedure, however, the transmission
characters will be different.
Note
To resume the operation, send "ACK" from the PC to the BL-1300 Series.
RTS/CTS
The BL-1300 Series operates according to the ON/OFF status of the RTS signal from the PC, as
follows.
When the RTS on the PC (CTS on the BL-1300 Series) turns off, the BL-1300 Series suspends data
transmission.
When the RTS on the PC turns on, the BL-1300 Series sends the suspended data.
While the RTS on the PC is turned off, the BL-1300 Series can read barcodes.
The data read during this period is stored in the send buffer.
While the RTS on the PC is turned off, the BL-1300 Series does not respond to command
communication (such as OK).
The RTS/CTS procedure cannot be used for RS-422A communication.

For communication other than RS-422A, the RTS/CTS procedure can be used with other handshaking
protocols.
Note
To resume the operation, turn on the RTS signal on the PC.
To use the N-UB or N-L1 dedicated communication unit, be sure to "enable" the RTS/CTS
protocol.
7-4
Send buffer capacity
The send buffer of the BL-1300 Series can store 8,192 bytes. (Including a header and a terminator)
When the send buffer overflows, the BL-1300 Series sends "OVER" to the PC and clears the buffer.
TIP You can check the send buffer overflow by assigning ERR BUSY to an output terminal.
Communication format
7
Data is sent to the PC with a header and a terminator as shown below.
Header Read data Terminator
You can add various types of data to the barcode data being read ( page 7-6).
You can choose the header and terminator from the following by using AutoID Navigator. In addition,
you can specify your own header/terminator consisting of 5 characters or less.
z Header
None/ STX / ESC
(02h) (1Bh)
z Terminator
CR / CR L F / ETX
(0Dh) (0Dh)(0Ah) (03h)
Read error code
When the BL-1300 Series fails to read a barcode, it sends back a read error code to the PC.
Initial setting
Header ERROR Terminator
Users can specify the read error code as desired within 8 characters using AutoID Navigator (
page 4-13), or select not to send a read error code.
7-5
Adding various data
You can add various kinds of data to the read data.
Read data format

The following data formats may be added to the read data.
When preventive maintenance information (PMI) is added
Data Symbology Barcode Supplementary Barcode Label reading Read

: : : :
size ID type information composition direction data
Preventive
Parameter Barcode Barcode left Barcode right
: : : maintenance : / Checksum
bank setting No. information end position end position
7 When PMI is not added

Data Symbology Barcode Supplementary Barcode Label reading Read

: : : :
size ID type information composition direction data
Parameter Barcode Decode Barcode left Barcode right

: : : / Scan count : / Checksum
bank setting No. count end position end position
Separation characters
The separation character ":" can be changed to a desired character by using AutoID Navigator.
The separation character "/" cannot be changed.
Notes on adding data

Specify the additional data by using AutoID Navigator or by sending commands.
Since the amount of added data items can be specified, the data size is variable.
Details of each additional data
Data size
The data size is four bytes representing the sum of the bytes of (1), (2), and (3).
(1) (2) (3)
Header Data size Read data + Additional data Checksum Terminator
7-6
Symbology IDs
Add the symbology identifier specified by AIM before the read data.
Barcode type Description Symbology ID

No check digit validation ]A0
CODE39 Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]A1
Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]A3
No check digit validation ]I0
ITF Check digit is validated and transmitted. ]I1
Check digit is validated but not transmitted. ]I3
Industrial2of5 ]S0
Standard2of5 ]R0
CODABAR ]F0
UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN/EAN 13-digit format ]E0
7
UPC/EAN
JAN/EAN 8-digit format ]E4
FNC1 not included. ]C0
CODE128 FNC1 on the first digit (CODE128). ]C1
FNC1 on the second digit. ]C2
CODE93 ]G0
COOP2of5 ]X0
GS1 DataBar ]e0
Code type
Add one character before the read data to indicate the type of the barcode.
Code type Barcode type

0 CODE39
1 ITF
2 2of5
3 CODABAR
4 UPC/EAN
5 CODE128
6 COOP2of5
7 Read error
8 CODE93
9 GS1 DataBar
Supplementary information
Add one character as a link flag when UPC/EAN, CODE128, or GS1 DataBar is composed composite
symbols. For other barcodes, "0" is added.
UPC/EAN
Output character Barcode combination

A UPC-A
B UPC-E
D EAN/JAN-8
E EAN/JAN-13
* Since a link flag cannot be created for UPC/EAN, the condition above is always added.
7-7
CODE128
Output character Combination of barcode and link information
0 Code128
1 EAN128
A GS1-128 with link flag
GS1 DataBar
Output character Combination of barcode and link information
1 GS1 DataBar Expanded
2 GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
3 RSS Limited
4 GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional
5 GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
7 A
B
GS1 DataBar Expanded with link flag
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked with link flag
C GS1 DataBar Limited with link flag
D GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional with link flag

E GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional with link flag
Barcode composition information

You can add "1" when barcode composition function is used to read a barcode.
Add "0" when you read a barcode without using the function.
Add "0" when you read a barcode for which the barcode composition is not activated.
Label reading direction

Add one character before the read data to indicate the direction in which the BL-1300 Series read the
barcode.
F: Forward reading
R: Reverse reading
Forward direction
Reverse direction
* When a read error occurs, this information is not added.
Parameter bank
Add one character which indicates the parameter bank number used to read a barcode while the
AGC reading is disabled.
Data range: 0 to 7 (Parameter banks 1 to 8)
7-8
Barcode setting number

Add one character which indicates the barcode setting number used to read a barcode.
Data range: 0 to 8 (Code 1 to Code 8, read error)
* When a read error occurs, 8 is added.
Preventive maintenance information (PMI)

Add PMI to indicate the reliability of barcode reading.
Data range: 0, 1, 2, or 9
Assessment criteria
PMI Calculation formula Assessment

0 Scan count/Decode count L1 Normal
1
2
L1 < Scan count/Decode count L2
L2 < Scan count/Decode count
Caution
Warning
7
9 Read error -
* L1 and L2 are PMI reference values. Be sure to set L2 larger than L1.
Note
When using the PMI function, it is not possible to add decode count and scan count
information.
Decode count
You can add the number of successful scans (decoding) during one barcode reading.
Data range: 0 to 9999
* The minimum value of the decode count is the value specified for the decode match count.
* When a read error occurs, 0 is added.
Note
When the decode count addition function is used, the data is sent with different timing than
with a normal operation:
When single label read mode is used:
The data is output after the trigger input turns off.
When multi-label read mode 1 is used:
The data is output when the repeat-reading time has passed after one barcode passed
across the laser beam field.
When the advanced setting is used:
When only one condition is specified, the data is sent after the trigger input turns off.
Scan count
The scan count (number of scans while the trigger input is on) can only be added to the read data
when the decode count is added to the read data.
7-9
Barcode position (Right end, left end)

You can add the positions of both ends of the barcode.
For details of the barcode position, refer to "Bar Code Position" in the Appendix.
* The left end is the side where the scan is started.
* When a read error occurs, 0000/0000 is added.
Checksum
The checksum is calculated with all data except for the header and terminator. The result is added as
two characters immediately before the terminator.
For the calculation method, refer to "Checksum Calculation Method" in the Appendix.
7 Header Read data + Additional data Checksum Terminator

Checksum calculation range
7-10
7-3 Details of command communication
This section describes the command communication performed between the BL-1300 Series and PC.
Type of command communication
The following two types of commands are used.
Direct control command

This command is used to directly operate the BL-1300 Series.
Setting command
This command is used to change or confirm the settings of the BL-1300 Series.
Procedure of command communication 7

1
Send a command (direct control/setting) from the PC to the BL-1300 Series.
Command
Response
BL-1300 Series
2 The BL-1300 Series sends back a response (OK or error).
Command communication format
Header and terminator

When the command format is Command CR , the response format is Response CR .
When the command format is STX Command ETX , the response format is STX Response ETX .
Command Response
Command CR Response CR
STX Command ETX STX Response ETX
* LF can be added at the end of the command. However, LF is not added to the response.
Note
When ESC is added before the command being sent, the data in the receive buffer of the BL-
1300 Series is cleared by ESC .
You can add ESC to the command being sent for the cases where the receive buffer
contains unnecessary characters due to data transmission error during communication.
For the communication with the BL-1300 Series, limit the interval between the
transmission of each character (each byte) to 30 seconds or less. If the interval exceeds
30 seconds, the BL-1300 Series clears the received characters.
7-11
Response error code
Error code Operation mode Error Description

The laser is OFF, or the laser is ON while the motor is stopped (LON,
NG Run mode
TEST).
ERR00 Setting mode Undefined command (This error may be caused by any command.)
ERR01 Setting mode Format error in command CODEm=n, MAXm=n, MINm=n, or MATCHm=n
WPnn, RPnn, WCmnn, RCmnn, WImnn, RImnn,
ERR02 Setting mode Part of the command (nn) is missing in commands such as WOmnn,
ROmnn, WSmnn, and RSmnn.
WCmnn, RCmnn, WImnn, RImnn,
ERR03 Setting mode "m" value is out of the effective range in commands such as WOmnn,
ROmnn, WSmnn, and RSmnn.
7
Valid barcode is not specified for bank (m) in commands such as WCmnn
ERR04 Setting mode
and RCmnn.
ERR05 Setting mode Argument format is incorrect.
ERR07 Setting mode n is other than 0 or 1.

Setting value range error for TESTn, WC034, angle setting (SDEG, WDEG),
ERR08 Setting mode
SDEG, or WDEG
Range error in numeric value setting command
ERR09 Setting mode
Odd number is specified for the number of digits of TF.
ERR10 Setting mode Format of HEX specification command is incorrect.
This command requires multiple-byte specification and does not accept 0
ERR11 Setting mode
byte setting.
Data for the command requiring multiple-byte specification is too long or
ERR12 Setting mode
short.
Control characters 0x01 to 0x1f and 0x7f to 0xff cannot be specified for the
ERR13 Setting mode
command requiring multiple-byte specification.
Reading from/writing to EEP-ROM failed.
ERR14 Setting mode
Verification error
ERR15 Setting mode Reading from EEP-ROM failed.
ERR16 Setting mode Reading settings failed.
ERR17 Setting mode \ is not followed by !, ?, or \ in preset data.
ERR18 Setting mode Three or more !'s exist in preset data.
During batch
ERR22 Reading a batch-set barcode failed.
setting reading
During batch
ERR23 The barcode is not a batch-set barcode.
setting reading
ERR28 Setting mode Data exceeds the specified length for WA or RA command (992 bytes).
ERR29 Setting mode Response to WA or RA command exceeded 992 bytes.
ERR30 Setting mode The specified command cannot be used for WA or RA command.
ERR99 Run mode The BL-1300 Series may be faulty. Contact KEYENCE.
* When an unnecessary character is added after a command, ERR00 is returned.
* When PASS/RTRY (ACK/NAK) is enabled and the BL-1300 Series receives PASS/RTRY (ACK/NAK)
in setting mode, it does not return an error response.
* When PASS/RTRY (ACK/NAK) is disabled and the BL-1300 Series receives PASS/RTRY (ACK/NAK)
in run mode, it does not return an error response, either. When this occurs while the BL-1300 is in
setting mode, it returns ERR00.
7-12
Direct control command
This section describes the details of each direct control command.
Read operation control
Trigger input ON
Transmision command: LON
Response : None
Trigger input on by specifying a parameter bank

Starts reading operation by specifying a preset parameter bank.
Command
Response
: LONm (m = 0 to 7: Parameter bank 1 to 8)
: None
7
Trigger input OFF
Command : LOFF
Response : None
The reading of the BL-1300 controlled with these commands is the same as the reading operation
triggered with a timing input.
When the label read mode is "single" and the data transmission timing is "after reading", sending
LOFF is unnecessary.
The command characters can be changed as desired within 8 characters.
Preset data registration
Start preset data registration

Command : PRON
Response : None
Finish preset data registration

Command : PROFF
Response : None
Up to 174 digits of preset data can be registered.
Test mode control
Starts or quits a test mode.
Start reading ratio test mode

Command : TEST1
Response : None
7-13
Start tact measurement test mode

Command : TEST2
Response : None
Start barcode position test mode

Command : TEST3
Response : None
Quit test mode

Command : QUIT
Response : None
7 Start online test mode 1

Command : #TEST1
Response : OK
Start online test mode 2

Command : #TEST2
Response : OK
Quit online test mode

Command : #QUIT
Response : OK
I/O terminal control
Checks the input terminal status and controls ON/OFF of the output terminals.
Check the input terminal status

Command : INnCHK
Response : ON (The input terminal is turned on.)
OFF (The input terminal is turned off.)
n = 1 (IN1 terminal) or 2 (IN2 terminal)
Turn on/off the output terminal (individual control)

Turn on OUTn Command : OUTnON
Turn off OUTn Command : OUTnOFF
Response : OK
n = 1 to 4 (OUT1 to OUT4 terminals)
Turn on/off the output terminal (batch control)

Turn on all outputs Command : ALLON
Turn off all outputs Command : ALLOFF
Response : OK
7-14
Resetting the BL-1300 Series
Reset the BL-1300 Series to the condition at power-on without actually turning off the power.
Command : RESET
Response : OK
* The BL-1300 Series is reset after outputting the OK response.
Forced laser OFF/Resetting laser OFF
Forces the laser emission to turn off when the laser beam may harm operators. After this command is
received, the laser emission is disabled even when the trigger input (command) turns on.
Forced laser off Command : LOCK 7
Reset laser off Command : UNLOCK
Response : OK
Check laser off statusCommand : RLOCK
Response : LOCK (Forced laser off active)
UNLOCK (Forced laser off reset)
* When the Forced laser off command is executed, the BL-1300 Series cannot read barcodes until
the command is reset. If the BL-1300 Series receives the trigger input on or test mode command
while the laser has been forced to OFF, it returns "NG".
* Forced laser OFF is not reset even when the BL-1300 Series is turned off.
* When the Forced laser OFF command is received, LED 1 on the STABILITY LED flashes.
Motor control
Stops motor rotation.

Motor stop Command : MOTOROFF
Cancel motor stop Command : MOTORON
Response : OK
Check motor status Command : RMOTOR
Response : MOTOROFF (Motor is stopped.)
MOTORON (Motor is operating.)
* When the BL-1300 Series receives MOTOROFF, the laser emission is forced to turn off. If the BL-
1300 Series receives the trigger input on or test mode command while the motor has been
stopped, it returns "NG".
* When the power off or RESET command is received after MOTOROFF is received, MOTOROFF is
not canceled.
* When the Motor stop command is received, LED 2 of STABILITY LED flashes.
7-15
Changing the laser scanning width
Change the starting position of the laser scan and scanning angle.
The maximum scanning angles are:
60 for the front type (BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371), and 57 for the side type
(BL-1350HA/1351HA).
Set the scanning start angle

Command : SDEGa a = 0 to 400 (Unit: 0.1)
default : 0
Response : OK
Check the scanning start angle

7 Command : SDEG
Response : a a = 0 to 400
Set the scanning angle

Command : WDEGb b = 200 to 600 (Front type, Unit: 0.1)
default : 600
200 to 570 (Side type, Unit: 0.1)
default : 570
Response : OK
Check the scanning angle

Command : WDEG
Response : b b = 200 to 600 (Front type)
200 to 570 (Side type)
Front type: 60
d Side type: 57 c
Note
b The scanning width cannot be specified to
a
exceed the angle range between c and d (Front
type: 60, side type: 57).
Approx. Approx. The angle specified here should be used as a
60 60
guide. If precise adjustment is required, perform
the adjustment on the barcode reader after
installation.
7-16
Clearing the send buffer
Clears the send buffer of the BL-1300 Series.

Command : BCLR
Response : OK
Starts/Finishes auto-trigger setting
Starts/finishes the Auto-trigger setting.

Start Auto-trigger setting Command : WTEACHON
Response : None
Finish Auto-trigger mode Command : WTEACHOFF
Response : WTEACHOK (Setting completed)
WTEACHNG (Setting failed) 7
* The Auto-trigger setting continues from the reception of the WTEACHON command to the reception
of the WTEACHOFF command.
Reading history check
Check the four reading history items since power-on: Reading (verification) OK count, verification NG
count, read ERROR count, and trigger input count.
Command : NUM
Response : OK/NG/ERR/TIMING = a/b/c/d
a = Reading (verification) OK count (0 to 65535)
b = Verification NG count (0 to 65535)
c = Read ERROR count (0 to 65535)
d = Trigger input count (0 to 65535)
* The reading history is reset when the power is turned off or when the RESET command is received.
* During the preset data registration, the OK/NG/ERR events are not counted.
Shifting in or out of the setting mode
Shifts from the run mode to the setting mode, or quits the setting mode.
Shift to the setting mode Command : SSET
Response : OK
Quit the setting mode Command : SEND
Response : OK
* Even during reading, the BL-1300 Series shifts to the setting mode immediately when receiving the
SSET command.
* After you finish the setting, do not forget to send the SEND command to the BL-1300 Series to
return it to the run mode.
7-17
Setting command
Setting command communication procedure
This section describes the procedure for setting command communication.
1 Send the setting mode command (SSET) to the BL-1300 Series.

The BL-1300 Series shifts to setting mode.
If the command is successfully executed: The BL-1300 Series sends back "OK".
2 Send a command to change or confirm the setting.
7 When the setting change command is sent:

If a setting error occurs : The BL-1300 Series sends back "ERR**" (**: Error code).
When the setting confirmation command is sent:

If the command is successfully executed: The BL-1300 Series sends back the current setting data.
If an error occurs : The BL-1300 Series sends back "ERR**" (**: Error code).
3 To save the settings in the EEP-ROM, send the save command "SAVE".
Once the settings are saved in the EEP-ROM, the BL-1300 Series will start with the saved settings the
next time it is turned on.
If an error occurs : The BL-1300 Series sends back "ERR**" (**: Error code).
4 Send the command (SEND) to return the BL-1300 Series to run mode.
If an incorrect command is sent : The BL-1300 Series sends back "ERR**".
7-18
Setting command details
Initializing/saving/quitting the settings or reading a batch-setting barcode

Function Command Response Description Error code
Save settings in the
SAVE OK ERR14
memory.
ERR14
Return to the factory-default
Initialize settings DFLT OK ERR15
settings.
ERR16
Start batch-set
RCON OK Start reading a batch-set barcode. ERR00
barcode reading
Check batch-set OK
barcode reading RCCHK READING
status NG
Quit batch-set
barcode reading
RCOFF OK ERR00 7
Quit the setting mode and return to
Quit the setting mode SEND OK ERR14
the run mode.
* When the SAVE command is sent, the settings are saved in the memory. (100,000 times rewritable)
* When you start reading a batch-set barcode by sending the RCON command, you must quit the
reading by sending the RCOFF command.
Perform a reading operation
n = 0 to 3
Change WP12n OK 0 : Single label read mode
Read mode ERR05
1 : Multi-label read mode 1
setting ERR08
Confirm RP12 12n 2 : Multi-label read mode 2
3 : Multi-label read mode 3
Data Change WP13n OK n = 0 or 1
ERR05
transmission 0: Send data after reading
Confirm RP13 13n ERR08
timing 1: Send data after trigger input turns off
Repeat-read Change WPC1nnnn OK ERR05
nnnn = 0 to 9999 (Unit: 10 ms)
time setting Confirm RPC1 C1nnnn ERR09
Decode Change WP43nnn OK ERR05
nnn = 001 to 255
match count Confirm RP43 43nnn ERR09
Change WPB0n OK n = 500 to 1300 (zero-suppress not used)
Scan count ERR05
* Round the value to the nearest 100
setting Confirm RPB0 B0nnnn ERR09
scans.
n = 0, 1, or 2
AGC (Auto Change WPB1n OK 0: AGC
ERR05
Gain Control) 1: Use the initial setting value of the
ERR08
setting Confirm RPB1 B1n parameter bank
2: Use the parameter bank
hhhh... = Read error code
Change WP55hhhh.. OK (8 characters max.) ERR06
Read
* Specify the characters in HEX ERR10
error code
Confirm RP55 55hhhh.. (hexadecimal) code. ERR12
* hhh... = FF: No setting
n = 0 to 3
Test mode Change TESTn OK 0: Cancel
ERR05
started at 1: Reading ratio test mode
ERR08
power-ON Confirm TEST TESTn 2: Tact measurement test mode
3: Barcode position test mode
Change WP05n OK n = 0 to 2
Trigger input 0: Level synchronization ERR05
signal type 1: One-shot synchronization ERR08
Confirm RP05 05n 2: Auto-trigger mode
7-19

One-shot Change WPA0nnnn OK ERR05
input time Confirm RPA0 A0nnnn ERR09
Auto-trigger Change WPA2nnn OK nnn = 8 to 248 ERR05
scan count Confirm RPA2 A2nnn * Specify the value as a multiple of 8. ERR09
Auto-trigger Change WPA3nnnn OK ERR05
resume n = 1 to 9999 (Unit: 10 ms)
Confirm RPA3 A3nnnn ERR09
time setting
Trigger input Change WP56hhhh.. OK hhhh... = Trigger input ON command ERR06
ON (8 characters max.) ERR10
command * Specify the characters in HEX ERR11
Confirm RP56 56hhhh..
characters (hexadecimal) code. ERR12
Trigger input Change WP57hhhh.. OK hhhh... = Trigger input OFF command ERR06
OFF (8 characters max.) ERR10
command * Specify the characters in HEX ERR11
Confirm RP57 57hhhh..
characters (hexadecimal) code. ERR12
7
Data addition function commands

Change WP10n OK n = 0 or 1
ERR05
Add decode count 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR05
Add scan count 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR05
Add label reading direction 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR05
Add barcode type function 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR05
Add symbology ID 0: Disable
1: Enable
n = 0 or 1
Add preventive maintenance Change WP86n OK ERR05
0: Disable
information (PMI) Confirm RP86 86n ERR07
1: Enable
Change WP48nnn OK ERR05
PMI preset value 1 n = 000 to 100
Confirm RP48 48nnn ERR09
Change WP49nnn OK ERR05

PMI preset value 2 n = 000 to 100
Confirm RP49 49nnn ERR09
Change WPE0n OK n = 0 or 1
Add supplementary ERR05
0: Disable
information Confirm RPE0 E0n ERR07
1: Enable
Add parameter bank ERR05
0: Disable
number used for reading*1 Confirm RPE1 E1n ERR07
1: Enable
n = 0 or 1
Add barcode setting number Change WPE2n OK ERR05
0: Disable
used for reading Confirm RPE2 E2n ERR07
1: Enable
ERR05
Add barcode position 0: Disable
Confirm RPE3 E3n ERR07
1: Enable
Add barcode composition ERR05
0: Disable
result Confirm RPE4 E4n ERR07
1: Enable
*1 Added only when the AGC mode is disabled.
7-20
Barcode settings (Common parameters)

m = 0 to 7: Codes 1 to 8
n = 0 to 9
0: CODE39
Change CODEm=n OK
1: ITF
2: 2of5
ERR01
3: CODABAR
Barcode type ERR03
4: EAN/UPC
ERR09
5: CODE128
6: COOP2of5
Confirm CODEm mn
7: No setting
8: CODE93
9: GS1 DataBar
Maximum No. of Change MAXm=nnn OK m = 0 to 7: Codes 1 to 8
readable digits Confirm MAXm mnnn nnn = 1 to 148
* For ITF, specify even number only.
ERR01 7
ERR03
Change MINm=nnn OK This setting is disabled for UPC/
Minimum No. of ERR04
EAN. For barcodes other than
readable digits ERR09
Confirm MINm mnnn CODE128, the maximum value is
74.
Change WCm81n OK ERR03
Specify label n = 0 or 1
ERR05
reading direction 0: Disable
Confirm RCm81 81n ERR07
1: Enable
Label reading n = 0 or 1
ERR05
direction 0: Forward reading
1: Reverse reading
Maximum code n = 0 or 1
ERR05
length output 0: Disable
1: Enable
Direction for Change WCm84n OK ERR03
n = 0 or 1
maximum code ERR05
0: From the front
length output Confirm RCm84 84n ERR07
1: From the back
Effective digits for Change WCm85nnn OK ERR03
maximum code ERR05
Confirm RCm85 85nnn nnn = 1 to 148
length output ERR09
Starting digit for Change WCm86nnn OK ERR03
maximum code ERR05
Confirm RCm86 86nnn nnn = 1 to 148
length output ERR09
n = 0 or 1
Barcode ERR04
0: Do not use data for barcode
composition target ERR05
Confirm RCm70 70n composition
ERR07
1: Use data for barcode composition
7-21
CODE39-specific settings
m = 0 to 7: Codes 1 to 8 ERR03
Change WCm00n OK
Send start/stop n = 0 or 1 ERR04
character 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
CODE39 Change WCm01n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Check digit
0: Disable ERR05
(Modulus 43) validation Confirm RCm01 01n
1: Enable ERR07
CODE39 Change WCm02n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Check digit
0: Disable ERR05
transmission Confirm RCm02 02n
1: Enable ERR07
7 ITF-specific settings

Check digit Change WCm10n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
(Modulus 10/weight 3)
0: Disable ERR05
validation Confirm RCm10 10n
1: Enable ERR07
Change WCm11n OK
Check digit n = 0 or 1 ERR04
transmission 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
2of5-specific settings
Change WCm20n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Industrial 2of5 Permit
0: Not permited ERR05
1: Permited
Change WCm21n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Standard 2of5 Permit
0: Not permited ERR05
1: Permited
7-22
CODABAR-specific settings
Change WCm30n OK
Send start/stop n = 0 or 1 ERR04
character 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
Change WCm31n OK
Start/stop character n = 0 or 1 ERR04
type 0: Lower case ERR05
1: Upper case
Change WCm32n OK
Codabar/NW-7 Check n = 0 or 1 ERR04
digit validation 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
7
Codabar/NW-7 Check n = 0 or 1 ERR04
digit transmission 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
n = 0 to 6
Change WCm34n OK 0: Modulus 16
ERR03
1: Modulus 11
Codabar/NW-7 Check ERR04
2: Modulus 10/weight 2
digit type ERR05
3: Modulus 10/weight 3
ERR08
Confirm RCm34 34n 4: 7 Check DR
5: Weighted modulus 11
6: Runes
UPC/EAN-specific settings
Change WCm40n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Read UPC-E
0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
Change WCm41n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
Read EAN-8 (8 digits)
0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
Change WCm42n OK
Read EAN-13 (13 n = 0 or 1 ERR04
digits) 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
Change WCm43n OK
No. of output digits for n = 0 or 1 ERR04
UPC-A 0: 13 digits ERR05
1: 12 digits
Change WCm44n OK
Add UPC-E system n = 0 or 1 ERR04
code '0' 0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
GTIN support Change WCm4An OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
(Data of 14 digits with
0: Disable ERR05
leading zeros) Confirm RCm4A 4An
2: Enable ERR08
7-23
CODE128-specific settings
Change WCm51n OK
n = 0 or 1 ERR04
EAN-128 support
0: Disable ERR05
1: Enable
Change WCm54hh OK
EAN-128 separator hh = 00 to 7F ERR04
replacement * Specify the characters in HEX ERR05
Confirm RCm54 54hh ERR10
(hexadecimal) code.
GS1 DataBar-specific setting

7 m = 0 to 7: Codes 1 to 8
nnn = 000 to 031 (zero-suppress
not used)
Change WCm91nnn OK 1: Support GS1 DataBar

Expanded
2: Support GS1 DataBar
ERR03
Expanded Stacked
GS1 DataBar reading ERR04
4: Support GS1 DataBar Limited
options ERR05
ERR09
(Truncated)
Confirm RCm91 91nnn Stacked (Omnidirectional)
* Specify by sum of the values of
the codes to be read. (To
support all codes, specify 31.)
n = 0 to 2
Read a reverse bar ERR04
0: Automatic
code ERR05
Confirm RCm90 90n 1: Disable
ERR07
2: Enable
7-24
I/O terminal settings

m = 0 or 1
0: IN1 terminal
1: IN2 terminal
Change WIm00n OK n = 0 to 8
0: No assignment
1: Trigger input ERR03
Input terminal
2: Preset data input ERR05
function assignment
3: Start test mode ERR08
4: Set Auto-trigger
Confirm RIm00 00n 5: Reset PLC link error
6: Lock the laser
7: Lock the motor
8: Read batch-setting barcode
7
m = 0 or 1
Change WIm01n OK 0: IN1 terminal
Test mode for the 1: IN2 terminal ERR03
start test mode n = 0 to 2 ERR05
function 0: Reading ratio test mode ERR08
Confirm RIm01 01n 1: Tact measurement test mode
m = 0 or 1
ERR03
Synchronization with 1: IN2 terminal
ERR05
TIMING LED n = 0 or 1
ERR07
Confirm RIm02 02n 0: Disable
1: Enable
m = 0 or 1
ERR03
1: IN2 terminal
Input polarity ERR05
n = 0 or 1
ERR07
Confirm RIm20 20n 0: N.O. contact
1: N.C. contact
m = 0 or 1
ERR03
Trigger input at 1: IN2 terminal
ERR05
power-ON n = 0 or 1
ERR07
Confirm RIm21 21n 0: Invalid
1: Valid
m = 0 or 1
Change WIm10nn OK ERR03
0: IN1 terminal
Input time constant ERR05
1: IN2 terminal
Confirm RIm10 10nn ERR09
n = 1 to 10 (Unit: 1 ms)
7-25

m = 0 to 3
0: OUT1
1: OUT2
2: OUT3
Change WOm00nnnn OK 3: OUT4
nnnn = 0000 to 0480
0: No assignment
1: OK
2: NG ERR03
Output terminal
4: ERROR ERR05
function assignment
8: PRESET OK ERR09
16: POSITIN
32: TRG BUSY
64: LOCK BUSY
Confirm ROm00 00nnnn 128: MODE BUSY
7
256: ERR BUSY
* Specify value nnnn by the sum
of the values of the items to be
assigned.
Change WOm10nnnn OK m = 0 to 3
0: OUT1
ERR03
Output ON time 1: OUT2
ERR05
setting 2: OUT3
Confirm ROm10 10nnnn ERR09
3: OUT4
nnnn = 0001 to 9999 (Unit: 10 ms)
Start test mode at ERR05
0: Disable
trigger input ON Confirm RP06 06n ERR07
1: Enable
n = 1 to 3
Test mode to be Change TRGTn OK
1: Reading ratio test mode ERR05
started at trigger
2: Tact measurement test mode ERR08
input ON Confirm TRGT TRGTn
7-26
Communication settings (Common + Non-PLC link parameters)

n = 0 to 9
0: 9600 bits/s
Change WP35n OK 1: 4800 bits/s
2: 2400 bits/s
3: 1200 bits/s
ERR05
Baud rate 4: 600 bits/s
ERR08
5: 38400 bits/s
6: 31250 bits/s
Confirm RP35 35n 7: 19200 bits/s
8: 57600 bits/s
9: 115200 bits/s
ERR05
Data length 0: 7 bits
7
1: 8 bits
ERR05
Parity check 0: Disable
1: Enable
ERR05
Parity type 0: Even
1: Odd
ERR05
Stop bit length 0: 1 bit
1: 2 bits
ERR05
RTS/CTS protocol 0: Disable
1: Enable
Handshaking protocol ERR05
0: No handshaking
1 Confirm RP07 07n ERR07
1: Use protocol
Handshaking protocol ERR05
0: PASS/RTRY
2 Confirm RP08 8n ERR07
1: ACK/NAK
ERR05
Add checksum 0: Disable
1: Enable
Transmission delay Change WP98nnn OK ERR05
nnn = 000 to 255 (Unit: 1 ms)
time Confirm RP98 98nnn ERR09
ERR05
Add data size 0: Invalid
1: Valid
RS-485 multi-drop ERR05
0: Invalid
link setting Confirm RP34 34n ERR07
1: Valid
ID number for RS-485 Change WP44nn OK ERR05
nn = 01 to 31
multi-drop link Confirm RP44 44nn ERR09
hhhh... = Header
Change WP51hhhh.. OK (0 to 5 characters) ERR06
Header * Specify the characters in HEX ERR10
hhhh... = Terminator
Change WP52hhhh.. OK (0 to 5 characters) ERR06
Terminator * Specify the characters in HEX ERR10
7-27

hh = Separation character
Separation character Change WP50hh OK ERR06
(1 character)
for the data addition ERR10
* Specify the character in HEX
function Confirm RP50 50hh ERR12
(hexadecimal) code.
hhhh = Intermediate delimiter
Intermediate delimiter Change WP54hhhh.. OK ERR06
(5 characters max.)
for the multi-label read ERR10
* Specify the characters in HEX
mode Confirm RP54 54hhhh ERR12
(hexadecimal) code.
Communication settings (PLC link parameters)

n = 0 to 4
Change WP36n OK 0: Not use PLC link
ERR05
7 PLC link model
Confirm RP36 36n
1: SYSYMAC Series
2: MELSEC Series
ERR08
3: KV Series
n = 0 or 1
Trigger input through Change WP37n OK
ERR05
0: Disable
PLC link Confirm RP37 37n ERR07
1: Enable
Change WP45nn OK ERR05
DM head address nn = 00 to 99
Confirm RP45 45nn ERR09
Change WP47nn OK ERR05
PLC/station number nn = 00 to 31
Confirm RP47 47nn ERR09
n = 0 to 2
Change WP74n OK 0: 1 byte/1 address
1: 2 bytes/1 address (High-order ERR05
Data storage mode
to low-order) ERR08
Confirm RP74 74n 2: 2 bytes/1 address (Low-order
to high-order)
Other settings
STABILITY LED ERR05
0: Do not display
indicator Confirm RP09 09n ERR07
1: Display
Change WPD0n OK n = 0 or 1 ERR05
Use preset data
0: Disable
verification Confirm RPD0 D0n ERR07
1: Enable
aaaa = Preset data
Change WP68aaaa.. OK (148 ASCII characters
ERR12
max.)
Register preset ERR13
* Send just WP68 to delete
data ERR17
preset data.
Confirm RP68 68aaaa.. ERR18
* If no preset data exists, the
response is 68[nodata].
WA,
Command 1, Send or confirm the setting
Change OK
Command 2, commands as a batch. (992
Batch ERR28
Command 3... characters max.)
transmission of ERR29
RA, * When an error occurs, the
setting commands Response 1, ERR30
Command 1, "failed command, error code"
Confirm Response 2, is returned.
Command 2,
Response 3...
Command 3...
7-28
Special settings
n = 0 to 2
Change WP83n OK
0: Normal operation ERR05
Test switch function
1: Register preset data ERR08
Confirm RP83 83n
2: Set Auto-trigger
n = 0 to 7
0: 4x
Change WP0Mn OK
1: 5x
2: 6x
Scaling factor for the ERR05
3: 7x
quiet zone ERR08
4: 8x
Confirm RP0M 0Mn 5: 9x
6: 10x
7: 11x
7
Change WPD5n OK n = 0 or 1
Barcode position ERR05
0: Disable
check Confirm RPD5 D5n ERR07
1: Enable
Barcode left end Change WPD6nnnn OK ERR05
nnnn = 0 to 9999
position Confirm RPD6 D6nnnn ERR09
Barcode right end Change WPD7nnnn OK ERR05
nnnn = 0 to 9999
position Confirm RPD7 D7nnnn ERR09
n = 0 to 63
0: No setting
Change WPE8nn OK 1: Verification OK
2: Verification NG
4: Read error
ERR05
Output Data Muting 8: Data indicating the Auto-
ERR09
trigger setting completion
16: Preset data check result
Confirm RPE8 E8nnn
32: Test mode
* Specify by sum of the values of
the items to be specified.
Changing the decode Change WP93nnn OK ERR05
nnn = 000 to 255
match Cancel Confirm RP93 93nnn ERR09
Set user-defined string hhhh = User-defined string (8
Change WP5Ahhhh.. OK ERR06
* A desired string can characters max.)
ERR10
be registered with the * Specify the characters in HEX
Confirm RP5A 5Ahhhh.. ERR12
BL-1300. (hexadecimal) code.
7-29
Advanced settings
Change WPA1n OK n = 0 or 1
ERR05
Laser off timing 0: After data is determined
Confirm RPA1 A1n ERR07
1: After trigger input turns off
Change WPD1n OK n = 0 or 1 ERR02
Data determination
0: After conditions are met ERR05
timing Confirm RPD1 D1n 1: After trigger input turns off ERR07
Data transmission ERR05
0: After conditions are met
timing Confirm RP13 13n ERR08
1: After trigger input turns off
n = 0 to 2
Change WPD2n OK ERR05
0: Based on time
Data output order
1: Based on condition No.
Confirm RPD2 D2n ERR08
2: Based on position
7 OK/ERROR priority
(for data
0: OK priority
ERR05
ERR07
determination) Confirm RPD3 D3n 1: ERROR priority
OK/ERROR priority ERR05
0: OK priority
(for data transmission) Confirm RPD8 D8n ERR07
1: ERROR priority
Read error detection Change WPD4nnnn OK ERR05
timer Confirm RPD4 D4nnnn ERR09
n = 0 to 255
0: No setting
Change MATCHm=nnn OK 1: Condition 1
2: Condition 2
4: Condition 3
ERR03
Condition setting to be 8: Condition 4
ERR05
used 16: Condition 5
ERR09
32: Condition 6
64: Condition 7
Confirm MATCHm mnnn 128: Condition 8
* To set more than one
condition, specify by the sum
of their values.
7-30
Parameter bank settings

Change WSm00n OK m = 0 to 7: Parameter banks 1
to 8 ERR03
Use parameter bank n = 0 or 1 ERR05
Confirm RSm00 01n 0: Do not use ERR07
2: Use
Scan count for Change WPB2nnn OK ERR05
nnn = 0 to 255
parameter change Confirm RPB2 B2nnn ERR09
Change WPB3nnn OK n = 0 to 255 ERR05
* Setting 0 switches
Retry scan count
Confirm RPB3 B3nnn parameters regardless of the ERR09
decoding result.
Change WSm10n OK m = 0 to 7: Parameter banks 1
to 8
n = 0 to 7: Gain scaling factor
0: 1x 7
1: 2x ERR03
Gain scaling factor 2: 4x ERR05
Confirm RSm10 10n 3: 8x ERR08
4: 16x
5: 32x
6: 64x
7: 128x
Change WSm20hhhhhhhh OK m = 0 to 7: Parameter banks 1
ERR03
to 8
Gain coefficient ERR05
Confirm RSm20 20 hhhhhhhh = 00000000 to
ERR08
0007FFFF: Gain coefficient
m = 0 to 7: Parameter banks 1
Change WSm30n OK
to 8
n = 0 to 3 ERR03
Sensitivity 0: Low ERR05
Confirm RSm30 30n 1: Normal ERR08
2: High
3: Highest
Change WSm50n OK
to 8
n = 0 to 2
ERR03
0: Normal
Averaging ERR05
1: 1/2 (Ave) (Two times
Confirm RSm50 50n ERR08
averaging)
2: 1/4 (Ave) (Four times
averaging)
Change WSm60n OK to 8
n = 0 to 3
0: Disable ERR03
Bar width correction
1: Enlarge ERR08
Confirm RSm60 60n 2: Reduce
3: Delete bars and spaces
narrower than a certain width
Change WSm61nnnn OK m = 0 to 7: Parameter banks 1
ERR03
Bar width correction to 8
ERR05
value Confirm RSm61 61nnnn n = 0 to 9999: Correction
ERR09
value
7-31
MEMO
7
7-32
8
PLC Link
This chapter describes the features of the PLC link function.
8-1 Outline of the PLC Link............................................8-2

8-2 Setting Procedure....................................................8-4
8-3 Device Assignment .................................................8-7
8-4 Sample Program....................................................8-18
8-5 PLC Link Error .......................................................8-20
8-1
8-1 Outline of the PLC Link
This section describes the features of the PLC link function.
Outline of the PLC link
With the PLC link, the BL-1300 Series can write data directly to the internal memory (data memory
and data register) of a PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) via an RS-232C interface.
Since the BL-1300 Series directly controls the PLC's memory, no program is required for data
communication, resulting in a reduced number of programming steps.
Important
Compared to serial communication, the PLC link has the following limitations:
You cannot change the settings of the connected BL-1300 Series through the PLC link.
You cannot start the test mode through the PLC link.
When the data addition function is used, only the additional data assigned to the additional
data areas in the PLC memory is output.
8 You cannot use the PLC link to send operational commands.

(You can control the input terminals.)
PLC Link
Since the PLC link requires longer communication time, it is not suitable for the high-speed
applications.
The number of digits of data which can be processed is limited as follows:
When 1 byte/address writing is set: 64 digits max.
When 2 bytes/address writing is set: 128 digits max.
When multi-label read mode 3 is specified, only the data which meets the conditions
specified for Code 1 to 4 of the bar code setting is written to the data memory. Data of
Code 5 and above are discarded.
In expert read mode, when the laser off timing is set to at trigger input OFF and five or
more conditions have been specified, only the first four data sets are written to the data
memory. The fifth and subsequent data sets are discarded.
The test mode, output data of preset registration, and teaching output data in the Auto-
trigger mode are not written to the specified data memory through the PLC link.
List of applicable PLC models
KEYENCE
Series name Connection method Model

Built-in CPU port KV-3000/1000/700
KV Series KV-L20V
Communication unit
KV-L20R
8-2
8-1 Outline of the PLC Link
Mitsubishi Electric

AJ71UC24
Computer link unit
A1SJ71UC24-R2/PRF
MELSEC Series AJ71QC24N/-R2/-R4
Serial communication unit A1SJ71QC24N/-R2/-R4
QJ71C24N/-R2/-R4
OMRON

CS1 Series
CJ1 Series
Built-in CPU port
CP1H Series*
SYSMAC Series CP1L Series*
Communication board CS1W-SCB21-V1/41-V1
Communication unit
CS1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1 8
CJ1W-SCU21-V1/31-V1/41-V1
PLC Link
* The CP1W-CIF01/CP1W-CIF11 option board is required.
Internal devices used for the PLC link
The following internal devices in the PLC can be accessed through the PLC link.
PLC Device name Memory area

KV-5000/3000/1000/700 Data memory DM0000 to DM9999
MELSEC Series Data register D0000 to D8191
SYSMAC Series Data memory DM0000 to DM9999
Note The available memory area may differ from the range noted above depending on the PLC
model. Confirm the actual range in the instruction manual for the specified model.
8-3
8-2 Setting Procedure
This section describes how to set the BL-1300 Series and PLC.
Setting the BL-1300 Series
Use AutoID Navigator to set the BL-1300 Series in the following steps.
1 On the port setting tab, select use for "PLC link".
2 For "Connected PLC", select the series name of the PLC to be used.
Mitsubishi MELSEC Series
KEYENCE KV Series
Omron SYSMAC Series
3 Select "Baud rate", "Data length", "Parity" and "Stop bits" according to the settings of the PLC
8 to be connected.
The initial settings of each PLC model are as follows:
PLC Link
PLC KV Series MELSEC Series SYSMAC Series

Baud rate 9600 bits/s 9600 bits/s 9600 bits/s
Data length 8 bits 8 bits 7 bits
Parity Even (e) Odd (o) Even (e)
Stop bit length 1 bit 1 bit 2 bits
4 Select whether to use "PLC trigger area".

Select "Enable" when you use "X+04 PLC trigger area" for the PLC link to control the reading of the
connected BL-1300 Series.
Select "Disable" when you use external inputs.
5 Specify "DM head address".

For details of the DM assignment, refer to page 8-7.
6 Select "DM data storage mode".

1 byte/address
2 bytes/address (High-order to low-order)
2 bytes/address (Low-order to high-order)
7 Specify the station No.

Specify the station No. of the communication unit connected to the PLC.
8-4
KV Series settings
Operation mode KV mode (host link)

Interface RS-232C*1
Station No. 0
Baud rate 9600 bits/s*2
Data length 8 bits*3
Parity Even (e)*3
Stop bit length 1 bit*3
Checksum Disable*3
RS/CS flow control Disable (Port 1 only)
*1 To use port 2, select the interface of the communication unit (N-R2 or N-R4) to be connected.
*2 Specify the same baud rate as that of the BL-1300 Series.
*3 In KV mode, this setting is fixed.
In addition to KV mode (host link), either of the following operation modes can be selected:
8
TIP
Link mode............... Set the "Connected PLC" setting of the BL-1300 Series to "SYSMAC
Series".
PLC Link
Protocol mode 4 ..... Set the "Connected PLC" setting of the BL-1300 Series to "MELSEC
Series".
MELSEC Series settings
AJ71UC24 and A1SJ71UC24-R2/PRF
Link unit AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24-R2/PRF

Station No. setting 00 -
Mode select 4 (Protocol mode format 4)
Baud rate 9600 bits/s
Data length 8 bits
Parity Odd (o)
Stop bit length 1 bit
Sum check Exist
Running write enable/disable Enable
Main channel set RS-232C -
Computer link/multi drop link select Computer link -
AJ71QC24N and A1SJ71QC24N
Station No. setting 00

Mode select 4 (Dedicated protocol mode/ASCII mode/format 4)
Operation setting Independent
Data length 8 bits
Parity Odd (o)
Sum check Exist
Running write enable/disable Enable
Setting change permitted/prohibited Enable
Transmission speed 9600 bits/s
8-5
QJ71C24N/-R2/-R4
The communication parameters are set with GX-Developer.
("I/O assignment setting" of "PC parameter")
Type Intelligent
Model Model to be connected
No. of points 32
Starting XY Starting I/O signal No. of target unit (hexadecimal)
("Switch setting" of "I/O assignment setting" of "PC parameter")
Switch Setting item Setting value

Operation setting Independent
Data length 8 bits
Parity Odd (o)
8 Switch 1 (ch1) or Switch 2 (ch2)
Sum check Exist
Running write Enable
PLC Link
Setting change Enable

Communication speed 9600 bits/s
Switch 1 (ch1) or Switch 2 (ch2) Communication protocol MC protocol format 4
Switch (5) Station No. setting 0
SYSMAC Series settings
The communication parameters are set with CX-Programmer.
Built-in CPU port

PLC System setting Host link port (Serial port)
Communication setting Specified by user
Parameter 7,2,E
Mode Host link
Machine No. 0
* When the normal communication setting is selected, the baud rate and parameter are fixed as
noted above.
Communication board (CS1W-SCB--V1)

Communication unit (CS1W-SCU--V1, CJ1W-SCU--V1)
I/O table and unit setting

Custom setting Enable
Communication mode Host link
Data length 7 bits
Stop bits 2 bits
Parity Even
Transmission speed 9600 bps
CTS control None
Host link machine No. 0
8-6
8-3 Device Assignment
This section describes the device assignment used for the PLC link.
The internal devices in the PLC are assigned as shown in the tables below. The assignment starts
from the "DM head address" set to the BL-1300 Series.
Tables of DM assignment
Address number of the DM to be assigned. "" represents the "DM head address"
Address
set to the BL-1300 Series.
Description Function or content assigned to the DM.
Data Value of the data to be written in the DM and its meaning
"O" indicates that the BL-1300 Series writes data. "" indicates that the BL-1300
Write from BL-1300
Series does not write data.
"O" indicates that writing from the PLC is required. "" indicates that writing from the
Write from PLC
PLC is not required.
Address Description Data

Write from
BL-1300
Write from
PLC
8
Data write starting address
PLC Link
In multi-label read mode 3: The data of Code
X+00 1 is written in this area. A (0000 to 9900) {
In expert read mode: The 1st data is written
in this area.
2 is written in this area.
X+01 B (0000 to 9900) {
In expert read mode: The 2nd data is written
in this area.
X+02 C (0000 to 9900) {
In expert read mode: The 3rd data is written
in this area.
X+03 D (0000 to 9900) {
In expert read mode: The 4th data is written
in this area.
1: Trigger on
X+04 PLC trigger area { {
0: Trigger off
PLC trigger input response area
1: Process is completed. {
X+05 * Only when the signal type is set to "Level" {
0: Process is not completed. (1 0)
(level signal trigger)
0: The setting value of the BL
One-shot input time setting area is used.
X+06 * Only when the signal type is set to "One-shot" 1 to 255: One-shot input time {
(one-shot signal trigger) specified from the PLC
(x 100 ms)
Note Addresses X+01 to X+03 are not used in single label read mode and when only one
condition is set for multi-label read mode 1/2 or expert read mode. (Do not use these
addresses in a PLC program.)
In multi-label read mode 1/2, the read data is written one at a time to the area specified
with X+00 in the order of output.
8-7
The areas to store written data are assigned using the values in addresses X+00 to X+03 as the "data
write starting addresses" (A, B, C, and D).
The table below shows the case where A is the data write starting address.
(The assignment is the same for the cases of B, C, and D.)
Write from Write from

BL-1300 PLC
0 or 1: Real-time processing
A+00 Data write flag area { {
2 or 3: Sequential processing
0: Read error
A+01 Label reading direction 1: Forward reading { {
2: Reverse reading
When decode count is added to output
data: 0 to 9999
When PMI is added to output data
A+02 Decode count/PMI 0: Normal { {
8 1: Caution
2: Warning
9: Read error
PLC Link
A+03 Scan count Scan count: 0 to 9999 { {

0: CODE39
1: ITF
2: 2of5
3: CODABAR
4: UPC/EAN
A+04 Bar code type { {
5: CODE128
6: COOP2of5
7: Read error
8: CODE93
9: GS1 DataBar
A+05 Number of digits*1 No. of digits of read data: 1 to 148 { {
*2 One ASCII code character
A+06 1st digit of bar code data { {
(written to low-order 8 bits)
One ASCII code character
A+07 2nd digit of bar code data*2 { {
... ... ...
One ASCII code character
A+69 64th digit of bar code data*2 { {
*1 The number of digits is the number of all digits of the read bar code.
*2 The assignment above is the case where the DM data storage mode is set to 1 byte/address.
For details of the case where 2 bytes/address is set, refer to "DM data storage mode" (Page 8-16).
Note An area of 70 words is assigned to write data of additional data and bar code data.
If the area cannot hold entire bar code data, the data of the overflowed digits is discarded.
Maximum number of digits for writing data when the DM data storage mode is set to 1
byte/address: 64 digits
Maximum number of digits for writing data when the DM data storage mode is set to 2
bytes/address: 128 digits
Note that the value written in A+05 is the number of digits of the data read with the BL-1300
Series regardless of the operation above.
8-8
Detailed description of DM assignment
Data write starting address (X+00 to X+03)
Address Description Data Data format

A: Data write starting address
X+00 (Data of Code 1 in multi-label read mode 3, First data in expert
read mode)
(B: Data of Code 2 in multi-label read mode 3, Second data in
X+01
expert read mode) 0000 to 9900 Binary
(C: Data of Code 3 in multi-label read mode 3, Third data in expert
X+02
read mode)
(D: Data of Code 4 in multi-label read mode 3, Forth data in expert
X+03
read mode)
Specify the starting address A of the area where the data read with the BL-1300 Series is written. 8
When a bar code is read, the BL-1300 Series checks the data specified in X+00 (A) and then writes
PLC Link
the read data in the data memory starting from address A.
Setting example 1: When "DM head address" set to the BL-1300 is 0100
PLC
Address Data Address Description
X+00 DM100 1000 DM1000 Data write flag area
DM1001 Label reading direction
DM1002 Decode count/PMI
DM1003 Scan count
DM1004 Bar code type
DM1005 Number of digits
DM1006 1st digit of bar code data
... ...
* Addresses X+01 to X+03 are used only in multi-label read mode 3 and when two or more
conditions are specified in expert read mode. Although X+01 to X+03 are not used in the other
read modes, do not use these areas with the PLC because they are reserved.
8-9
Setting example 2: When bar code types are specified to "Code 1" to "Code 3" in multi-label read mode 3
(No setting for "Code 4" to "Code 8"), and
"DM head address" set to the BL-1300 is 0100
PLC
Address Data
X+00 DM100 1000
X+01 DM101 2000
X+02 DM102 3000
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3

Address Description Address Description Address Description
DM1000 Data write flag area DM2000 Data write flag area DM3000 Data write flag area
DM1001 Label reading direction DM2001 Label reading direction DM3001 Label reading direction
DM1002 Decode count/PMI DM2002 Decode count/PMI DM3002 Decode count/PMI
8
DM1003 Scan count DM2003 Scan count DM3003 Scan count
DM1004 Bar code type DM2004 Bar code type DM3004 Bar code type
DM1005 Number of digits DM2005 Number of digits DM3005 Number of digits
PLC Link
* When multi-label read mode 3 is specified, the data of the bar code type specified for Code 5 to
Code 8 is not written to the data memory and is discarded.
* When expert read mode is specified, the fifth and subsequent data sent to the data memory is not
written and is discarded.
Reading trigger area (X+04 to X+06)
These areas are used when the BL-1300 Series is set to "Enable" the "PLC trigger area". When
"Disable" is selected, these areas can be used for other purpose.
The usage of these areas varies depending on the signal type setting of the BL-1300 Series.
When the level signal trigger is set

1: Trigger on
X+04 PLC trigger area
0: Trigger off
1: Process is completed. Binary
X+05 PLC trigger input response area
0: Process is not completed.
X+06 Reserved -
When "1" is written in address X+04, the BL-1300 Series starts reading.
Address X+05 is an area used to check whether the BL-1300 Series properly recognized the data in
X+04. When the BL-1300 Series recognizes the data in X+04 properly (i.e. emits the laser beam), it
writes "1" in X+05.
Address X+06 is reserved.
8-10
Level signal trigger operation
1 Set address X+05 to "0".
2 To trigger the BL-1300 Series to start reading (to turn the trigger on), set address X+04 to "1".
3 When the BL-1300 Series recognizes the data in address X+04, it sets address X+05 to "1" and
starts reading.
If address X+05 is not set to "1", this means that the BL-1300 Series has not recognized the data in
address X+04. Do not attempt the next action.
After confirming that address X+05 is set to "1", reset the address to "0".
4 When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code successfully, it writes new data in A+05 to A+69.
5 To turn the trigger off, reset address X+04 to "0".

8
6 When the BL-1300 Series recognizes the change in address X+04, it sets address X+05 to "1"
PLC Link
and the trigger turns off.
7 If a read error occurs, a read error code is written in A+05 to A+69.
Note When you quickly change the data in address X+04 to turn the trigger on and off, the BL-
1300 Series may overlook the change in the address and fail to turn the trigger on or off
properly. In this case, change the program so that you can use address X+05 to check
whether the BL-1300 Series recognized the data in address X+04.
When the one-shot signal trigger is set

1: Trigger on
X+04 PLC trigger area and response area Binary
0: Trigger off
X+05 Reserved - -
0: The setting value of the BL-1300
X+06 One-shot input time setting area Series is used. Binary
1 to 255: 100 ms to 25.5 s
When "1" is written in address X+04, the BL-1300 Series starts reading.
You can use address X+06 to set the one-shot input time. When X+06 is "0", the one-shot input time
setting of the BL-1300 Series is used.
8-11
One-shot signal trigger operation
1 To trigger the BL-1300 Series to start reading (to turn the trigger on), set address X+04 to "1".
2 When the BL-1300 Series recognizes the data in address X+04, it sets address X+04 to "0" and
starts reading.
3 The BL-1300 Series continues reading for the "one-shot input time" set in address X+06.
4 When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code successfully, it writes new data in A+05 to A+69.
5 If a read error occurs, a read error code is written in A+05 to A+69.
Data write flag area (A+00)

8
The data write flag area is used to flag whether the bar code data is written successfully.
PLC Link
The following two processing methods are available depending on the application.
Real-time processing

0: Data writing ready
A+00 Data write flag area Binary
1: Data being written
A value of "0" or "1" is written to the data write flag area.
If "0" is written in address A+00 beforehand, the BL-1300 Series assumes that the real-time
processing will be performed.
While the BL-1300 Series is writing the read data in the PLC's memory, the value in address A+00
is set to "1". When the writing is complete, the value is reset to "0".
Note If the bar code reading interval of the BL-1300 Series is shorter than that of the PLC link
communication, the data that is not written in the PLC's memory but is stored in the send
buffer of the BL-1300 Series. Page 6-10)
If the amount of stored data exceeds the capacity of the send buffer (8192 bytes), the BL-1300
Series clears all the data in the buffer and writes "OVER" in addresses A+05 to A+69.
When the send buffer overflow occurs, the BL-1300 Series halts operation. It will resume
operation after writing "OVER" in the PLC's memory.
8-12
Real-time processing operation 1
1 Set address A+00 to "0".
2 While the BL-1300 Series is writing the read data in addresses A+05 to A+69, address A+00 is
set to "1".
3 When the BL-1300 Series completes writing the read data, address A+00 is reset to "0".
4 The PLC confirms that address A+00 is reset to "0", and then processes the data stored in
addresses A+05 to A+69 according to the program.
Real-time processing operation 2
1 Set address A+00 to "1".
2 When the BL-1300 Series completes writing the read data in addresses A+05 to A+69, address 8
A+00 is set to "0".
PLC Link
3 When the PLC recognizes address A+00 is set to "0", it writes "1" in A+00 and processes the
data stored in addresses A+05 to A+69.
Note In the real-time processing, when the BL-1300 Series continuously reads bar codes, data
which is not yet processed by the PLC may be overwritten with new data. To prevent the
problem, use the sequential processing.
Sequential processing

2: Data writing ready
A+00 Data write flag area Binary
3: Data writing completed
A value of "2" or "3" is written to the data write flag area.
If "2" is written in address A+00, the BL-1300 Series assumes sequential processing will be
performed.
When "2" is set to address A+00, the BL-1300 Series writes the read bar code data in addresses
A+05 to A+69.
When the BL-1300 Series completes writing data, it writes "3" in address A+00.
If "3" is set in address A+00, the BL-1300 Series does not write new data in the PLC's memory but
stores the data in its send buffer.
Note In the sequential processing, when "3" is set in address A+00, the BL-1300 Series does not
send new data to the PLC but stores the data in its send buffer. If the amount of stored data
exceeds the capacity of the send buffer (8192 bytes), buffer overflow occurs and the BL-1300
Series halts operation.
In this case, the BL-1300 Series halts operation until it sends "OVER" to the PLC.
Be sure to write "2" in address A+00 as soon as the PLC is ready to receive data.
8-13
Sequential processing operation
1 Write "2" in address A+00.
2 When the BL-1300 Series reads a bar code and recognizes that "2" is in address A+00, it writes
the read data in addresses A+05 to A+69.
3 When the BL-1300 Series completes writing the read data, it sets address A+00 to "3".
4 When the PLC recognizes address A+00 is set to "3", it processes the data stored in addresses
A+05 to A+69 according to the program.
5 Create a program so that "2" is written in address A+00 after the PLC completes processing the
data stored in addresses A+05 to A+69 and becomes ready to receive the next data.
8 Important If the value in the data write flag area is set to other than "0", "1", or "2", the BL-1300 Series
stores the read data in its send buffer instead of writing data in the PLC's memory.
PLC Link
If the amount of stored data exceeds the capacity of the send buffer (8192 bytes), buffer
overflow occurs and the BL-1300 Series halts all operation until it sends "OVER" to the PLC.
When, the value in address A+00 is set to other than "0", "1", or "2", the BL-1300 Series
cannot send "OVER" to the PLC allowing it to recover from the buffer overflow status.
Therefore, ensure that the PLC writes only 0, 1, or 2 to address A+00.
8-14
Additional data area (A+01 to A+04)
These areas store the additional data specified to the BL-1300 Series.

0: Read error
A+01 Label reading direction 1: Forward reading Binary
2: Reverse reading
When decode count is added to
A+02 Decode count Binary
output data: 0 to 9999
A+03 Scan count Scan count: 0 to 9999 Binary
0: CODE39
1: ITF
2: Industrial2of5
3: CODABAR
4: UPC/EAN
A+04 Bar code type Binary
5: CODE128
8
6: COOP2of5
7: Read error
8: CODE93
PLC Link
9: GS1 DataBar
When the BL-1300 Series is set to add PMI (Preventive Maintenance Information) to output data,
addresses A+02 and A+03 store the following instead of the data noted above.

0: Normal
Preventive maintenance information 1: Caution
A+02 Binary
(PMI) 2: Warning
9: Read error
A+03 Reserved - -
Data write area (A+05 to A+69)
These areas are used to write the number of digits and data of a bar code sent from the BL-1300
Series.
Number of digits
A+05 Number of digits No. of digits of read data: 1 to 148 Binary
This area stores the number of digits of the bar code read by the BL-1300 Series.
Note The number of digits stored in address A+05 contain the same number of digits sent from the
BL-1300 Series. Consequently, it may include the digits of start/stop characters when you
select to send start/stop characters in the detailed setting for CODE39 or CODABAR.
8-15
Bar code data (A+06 to A+69)

One ASCII code character/address (64 digits max.)
A+06 to A+69 Bar code data
Two ASCII code characters/address (128 digits max.)
The areas of 64 addresses (64 words) are assigned to write bar code data.
The "DM data storage mode" setting of the BL-1300 Series determines the data writing method: 1
byte/address or 2 bytes/address.
(Refer to "DM data storage mode".)
If the bar code data is larger than these 64 addresses, the overflowed data is discarded.
* The number of digits stored in address A+05 contain the same number of digits sent from the
BL-1300 Series.
DM data storage mode
8 The BL-1300 Series offers a "DM data storage mode" allowing selection of the method to write the
read data in the PLC's memory. Use AutoID Navigator or setting commands to set "DM data storage
PLC Link
mode".
Note The DM data storage mode setting affects only the bar code data areas (addresses A+06 to
A+69).
Note this setting is not applied to other areas (addresses X+00 to X+06 and A+00 to A+05).
DM data storage mode options

The following three options are available.
Select an appropriate option by considering the data memory capacity of the PLC.
Writing 1 byte/address
Write one digit of the read bar code data in one address.
Address High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits Data format

A+06 0x00 1st digit data
A+07 0x00 2nd digit data
A+08 0x00 3rd digit data ASCII code
... ...
A+06+(n-1) 0x00 nth digit data
* The maximum number of digits to be written is 64 digits (address A+69).

Data exceeding 64 digits is discarded.
* Null (0x00) is written in the high-order 8 bits.
8-16
2 bytes/address (High-order to low-order)

Write two digits of the read bar code data in one address.
The data of odd number digits is written in high-order 8 bits, and the data of even number digits is
written in low-order 8 bits.

A+06 1st digit data 2nd digit data
A+07 3rd digit data 4th digit data
A+08 5th digit data 6th digit data ASCII code
...
A+06+(n/2)-1 (n-1)th digit data nth digit data

* When the read data has an odd number of digits, null (0x00) is written in the last low-order 8
bits.
* When the start/stop characters are sent, the start character is written in the first digit.
8
2 bytes/address (Low-order to high-order)
PLC Link
Write two digits of the read bar code data in one address.
The data of odd number digits is written in low-order 8 bits, and the data of even number digits is
written in high-order 8 bits.

A+06 2nd digit data 1st digit data
A+07 4th digit data 3rd digit data
A+08 6th digit data 5th digit data ASCII code
...
A+06+(n/2)-1 nth digit data (n-1)th digit data

* When the read data has an odd number of digits, null (0x00) is written in the last high-order 8
bits.
* When the start/stop characters are sent, the start character is written in the first digit.
Note By default, "DM data storage mode" is set to 1 byte/address.

When you read bar codes with the maximum number of digits adjusted in the bar code
setting (74 digits), 2 bytes/address setting is recommended. Notes, however, that
CODE128 with start code C has the maximum No. of reading digits of 148 digits.
Consequently, the 129th and subsequent data is discarded even when 2 bytes/address is
set.
8-17
8-4 Sample Program
This sample program writes the read data in DM105(D105) and subsequent DM areas. Change the
program according to your application.
Settings of the BL-1300 Series

Signal type : Level signal trigger
Read mode : Single label read mode
DM head address: 1000
PLC trigger area: Enable
DM data storage mode: 1 byte/address
Processing of the data write flag area: Sequential processing

* Note that this sample program does not use "X+05 PLC trigger input response area" to check if the
BL-1300 Series properly recognized the "X+04 PLC trigger area".
8 Program for the KV Series

PLC Link
CR2008 #100
DW Specify 100 (DM100) as the address in
which read data is written.
DM1000
#0002
Write "2" in the "data write flag area"
DW
(sequential processing).
DM100
R000 #0001
DW
DM1004
Set R000 as the reading trigger
input.
R000 #0000
DW
DM1004
CR2002 DM100 #0003

LDA DW
When the data in DM100 is set to

CR2010 "3", the PLC performs the specified
Data written in DM105 and subsequent processing according to the
areas are processed according to the program.
program. When the processing is completed,
the PLC writes "2" in DM100.
#0002
DW
DM100
END
ENDH
8-18
8-4 Sample Program
Program for the MELSEC Series

SM402(M9038)
MOV K100 D1000 Specify 100 (DM100) as the address
in which read data is written.
MOV K2 D100 Write "2" in the "data write flag area"

(sequential processing).
XO
MOV K1 D1004
Set X0 as the reading trigger

input.
XO
MOV K0 D1004
Data written in DM105 and When the data in DM100 is set to

LD= D100 K3 subsequent areas are processed "3", the PLC performs the
according to the program. specified processing according
8
to the program.
When the processing is
MOV K2 D100 completed, the PLC writes "2" in
DM100.
PLC Link
END
Program for the SYSMAC Series
P_First_cycle
MOV Specify 100 (DM100) as the address in
&100 which read data is written.
D1000
MOV Write "2" in the "data write flag area"

#0002 (sequential processing).
D100
0.00
MOV
#0001
D1004 Set 0.00 as the reading trigger
0.00 input.
MOV
#0000
D1004
P_On
CMP
D100
#0003
When the data in DM100 is set to
P_EQ
Data written in DM105 and subsequent "3", the PLC performs the
areas are processed according to the specified processing according to
program. the program.
When the processing is completed,
MOV the PLC writes "2" in DM100.
#0002
D100
END
8-19
8-5 PLC Link Error
This section details if a communication error occurs during the PLC link operation.
When a PLC link error occurs

The BL-1300 Series indicates the occurrence of an error in the following methods:
The top LED in the STABILITY indicator (LED 5) flashes.
When the ERR BUSY function is assigned to one of the OUT output terminals, the corresponding
terminal turns on.
Since the BL-1300 Series halts operation, it does not accept any trigger inputs during this period.
Check points
When an error occurs, check the following points:
Check if the baud rate, data length, parity, and stop bit length specified for the BL-1300 Series and
PLC are the same.
Check if the BL-1300 Series is set to use the PLC link function.
8 Check if the connected PLC is set properly.
Check if the communication cable connections are correct, or if any cable is disconnected.
PLC Link
Check if the DM head address setting is out of the available data memory range of the PLC.
Communication is disabled if the specified DM head address causes the BL-1300 Series to occupy
the data memory areas which do not exist on the PLC.
Check if the PLC communication unit is set properly.
For more information on the proper communication settings, refer to the manual of the unit being
used.
After you finish setting the BL-1300 and the PLC, be sure to turn off the PLC and then turn on the
PLC.
Resetting an error
You can reset a PLC link error and resume communication using the following method.
Press the TEST switch of the BL-1300 Series.
When the Reset PLC link error function is assigned to the input terminal, turn on the corresponding
terminal.
If you cannot solve the problem using the methods noted above, contact your nearest KEYENCE
office.
8-20
9
Field Network
Communication
This chapter describes how to connect the BL-1300 Series to a field
network by using the NX-50 Series Network Controller.
9-1 Control Using CC-Link.............................................9-2

9-2 Control using DeviceNet .......................................9-14
9-3 Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series............9-27
9-1
9-1 Control Using CC-Link
This section describes how to control the BL-1300 Series connected to the NX-50CL (CC-Link
Controller) from a PLC across a network.
TIP For the detailed information about the functions and settings of the CC-Link master station
or PLC, refer to the manual of the individual device.
Building a system using CC-Link
To use the NX-50CL in a network using CC-Link, ensure the following:
The NX-50CL is a network controller designed to support CC-Link

Version 2.00.
It must be used together with a master device supporting CC-Link
Version 2.00.
Register the NX-50CL with the master unit as a Version 2 remote device station.
CC-Link allows for the connection of 64 units at maximum.
The number of connectable units, however, varies depending on the number of stations occupied
9 by each unit.
A single unit of the NX-50CL occupies at least two stations.
Field Network Communication
For the calculation of the number of occupied stations and the maximum number of connectable
units, refer to the manual of the CC-Link master device to be used.
The maximum total cable extension length of CC-Link is 1.2 km (at 156 kbps).
The table below shows the relationship between the communication speed and maximum cable
extension length.
Maximum total cable
Communication speed Inter-station cable length
extension length
156 kbits/s 1200 m
625 kbits/s 900 m
2.5 Mbits/s 20 cm or more 400 m
5 Mbits/s 160 m
10 Mbits/s 100 m
The NX-50CL must be connected with a dedicated CC-Link cable (Version 1.10 or higher).
For the units at both ends of CC-Link, a "termination resistor" (110 ) must be connected between
DA and DB.
Set the terminating resistance switch to ON when the NX-50CL is connected at the end of the
network.
For details of the terminating resistance switch, refer to "NX-50 Series" (Page 1-11).
9-2
Setting the NX-50CL
Use AutoID Navigator to set the parameters of the NX-50CL according to the CC-Link master unit to
be used.
This section describes only the settings of the CC-Link-related parameters of the NX-50CL.
TIP For other setting details of the NX-50CL, refer to "AutoID Navigator User's Manual" and
"NX-50 Series Operation Manual".
For the setting of the CC-Link master unit, refer to the manual of the device used as the
CC-Link master unit.
CC-Link setting parameters
Use AutoID Navigator to specify the following parameters:
Slave ID (No.) : Set the ID (station No.) of the NX-50CL. (1 to 63)

Baud rate : Specify the baud rate according to the setting of the master unit.
Selectable options are: 156k, 625k, 2.5M, 5M, and 10M (bit/s).
Station count/Expansion cyclic setting
: Select an appropriate option according to the data size of the target bar
code.
"Selecting the size to be occupied" (Page 9-9)
When you complete the setting of the parameters above, send the setting data to the NX-50CL.
TIP A single unit of the NX-50CL occupies at least two stations. It is impossible to set it to
occupy one station.
9-3
CC-Link operation and memory configuration
On CC-Link, the NX-50CL operates as a slave station (remote device station) of the CC-Link
connected with a network cable.
The buffer memory of the NX-50CL and the remote I/O as well as the remote registers of the CC-Link
master station are linked as shown in "Memory configuration" below.
Adjust the setting and programming to control the BL-1300 Series according to this memory
configuration ( "Setting and programming" (Page 9-8)).
Memory configuration
The buffer memory of the NX-50CL is linked as follows:
Slave Master
9
BL-1300 Series Host PLC CC-Link

NX-50CL master station
Buffer memory
CC-Link master station
Read control buffer A RY (remote output)
Read buffer
Read data buffer B RWw (remote register)
Write control buffer C RX (remote input)
Write buffer
Write data buffer D RWr (remote register)
9-4
A RY (remote output)
RY (remote output) is a control signal sent from the CC-Link master station to the NX-50CL. It controls
data communication between the Read/Write data buffer of the NX-50CL and RWw/RWr (remote
register) of the CC-Link master station. It also controls the operation of OUT terminals 1 through 4.

Signal
NX-50CL RY
direction Signal name Description
(remote output)
Sends a command stored in RWw on the
rising edge of the signal (OFF (0) ON
RY ( n + 0) CMD_REQ (1)).
The sending ends on the falling edge of
the signal (ON (1) OFF (0)).
Reads the data stored in the NX-50CL on
the rising edge of the signal (OFF (0)
RY ( n + 1) DATA_LATCH ON (1)).
The reading ends on the falling edge of
Read control the signal (ON (1) OFF (0)).
buffer RY ( n + 2)
2 bytes (16 bits) : - Reserved for system
RY ( n + 7)
RY ( n + 8) OUT1 Turns on/off the OUT1 terminal.*1 9
RY ( n + 9) OUT2 Turns on/off the OUT2 terminal.*1 ON: 1
RY ( n + A) Turns on/off the OUT3 terminal.*1

OUT3 OFF: 0
RY ( n + B) OUT4 Turns on/off the OUT4 terminal.*1
RY ( n + C)
: - Reserved for system
RY ( n + F)
n : This value varies depending on the station number of the NX-50CL.
*1: This operation is effective only when the output terminal of the NX-50CL is set to bus master status.
B RWw (remote register)

RWw (remote register) is an area to store "commands" sent from the CC-Link master station to the
NX-50CL.

Signal
NX-50CL RWw Signal
direction Description
(remote register) name
Stores the name of the High-order 1st character
RWw ( n + 0) CMD
command. Low-order 2nd character
Read data buffer
Stores the parameter High-order 1st character
RWw ( n + 1) PRM1*2
bank No. Low-order 2nd character
*2: This signal is effective only when the AGC reading of the BL-1300 Series is disabled.
9-5
C RX (remote input)
RX (remote input) indicates the status of the NX-50CL.

Signal
NX-50CL RX
direction Signal name Description
(remote input)
Turns on when the NX-50CL successfully
RX n + 0) CMD_ACK
receives a command.
Turns on when the NX-50CL receives an
RX ( n + 1) CMD_NAK
invalid command.
Turns on when a command error
*1 occurred (invalid command).
RX ( n + 2) ERROR1
(This signal is cleared when CMD_ACK is
returned next time.)
Turns on when a command error
*1 occurred (invalid parameter).
RX ( n + 3) ERROR2
Turns on when data transmission is
RX ( n + 4) DATA_STROBE
complete.
Write control
9 buffer RX ( n + 5) DATA_VALID
Turns on while sent data exists in the
buffer of the NX-50CL.
2 bytes (16 bits) ON: The head is
Indicates the head connected.

RX ( n + 6) HEAD
connection status. OFF: The head is not
connected.
Turns on when OVER is received from the
RX ( n + 7) OVER
head.
RX ( n + 8) OUT1
RX ( n + 9) OUT2
RX ( n + A) OUT3
Shows the ON/OFF status of the terminal.
RX ( n + B) OUT4
RX ( n + C) IN1
RX ( n + D) IN2
RX ( n + E)
- Reserved for system
RX ( n + F)
n : This value varies depending on the station number of the NX-50CL.
*1: ERROR1 and ERROR2 turn on at the same time with CMD_NAK.
9-6
D RWr (remote register)

RWr (remote register) stores the operation result received from the NX-50CL.
Signal CC-Link master station

NX-50CL
direction RWr (remote register) Description
Low-order "00": Data received
RWr ( n +0) Response code
High-order "E9": DM memory over*1
Low-order
RWr ( n +1) No. of read data packets*2
High-order
Low-order
RWr ( n +2) Offset value for the 1st read data table [A]*3
High-order
Low-order
RWr ( n +3) Offset value for the 2nd read data table [B]*4
High-order
Low-order
RWr ( n +4) Offset value for the 3rd read data table [C]*4
High-order
: : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +A) No. of digits of the 1st read data *5
High-order
High-order 1st digit data
RWr ( n +A+1)
Low-order 2nd digit data
High-order 3rd digit data
9
RWr ( n +A+2) 1st symbol data
Low-order 4th digit data

High-order 5th digit data
RWr ( n +A+3)
Write data Low-order 6th digit data
buffer : : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +B) No. of digits of the 2nd read data*5
High-order
RWr ( n +B+1)
RWr ( n +B+2) 2nd symbol data
RWr ( n +B+3)
: : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +C) No. of digits of the 3rd read data*5
High-order
RWr ( n +C+1)
RWr ( n +C+2) 3rd symbol data
RWr ( n +C+3)
: : :
n :The number assigned to RWr by the master (It varies depending on the number of stations occupied by the
NX-50CL and other slave devices.)
*1: Check that the settings under "Selecting the size to be occupied" on page 9-9 have been configured correctly.
*2: Since the number of data received in the single label read mode and multi-label read mode 1 is 1, the number
of read data is always 1. In other read modes, it varies according to the number of data received.
*3: The value is always A=3 in the single label read mode and multi-label read mode 1. In other read modes, it
varies according to the number of data received.
*4: Used only in multi-label read mode 3. When another mode is selected, this item is deleted and the
subsequent items are moved up.
*5: When the data addition function of the BL-1300 Series is used, this number includes the digits of the
specified additional data.
9-7
Setting and programming
The following setting and programming steps are required to use CC-Link to control the NX-50CL.
Setting the communication Set the communication speed and slave ID (Station No.) of the
parameters NX-50CL.
Calculate and set the data size required for communication.

Setting the data size
On the CC-Link master station, set the link area for the NX-50CL.
"Setting the data size" (Page 9-8)
Create a program according to the settings.
Create a program to send a command from the host PLC and to

Ladder program
receive the operation result data of the command using
handshaking signals.
Program run
9
Setting the communication parameters
Set the communication speed and slave ID (Station No.) of the NX-50CL by using AutoID Navigator
or setting commands.
AutoID Navigator: "CC-Link setting parameters" (Page 9-3)
Command setting: "Network (NX-50CL)" on page 5-13 of "NX-50 Series Operation Manual"
[Slave ID (Station No.)]

Specify the same slave ID (station No.) as the one assigned to the NX-50CL in CC-Link.
[Baud rate]
Specify the same baud rate (communication speed) as the one specified in CC-Link.
For the procedure to set the CC-Link master station, refer to the manual of the device.
Set the reading/writing size for the memory through CC-Link by using AutoID Navigator or setting
commands. The size is set with a combination of "No. of occupied stations" and "Extended cyclic
setting".
AutoID Navigator: "CC-Link setting parameters" (Page 9-3)
Command setting: "Network (NX-50CL)" on page 5-13 of "NX-50 Series Operation Manual"
For the calculation method of the required size, refer to "Memory size calculation" (Page 9-9)
9-8
Memory size calculation

A single unit of the NX-50CL occupies the following sizes in the memory of the CC-Link master unit.
Description Size
A Output control buffer Control data 2 bytes (16 bits)
Control command 2 bytes
B Output data buffer
Parameter 2 bytes
C Input control buffer Control data 2 bytes (16 bits)
Response code 2 bytes
No. of read data packets 2 bytes
D Input data buffer 2 bytes or more (Varies depending on the
Data offset value
number of read data packets.)
Number of read data digits 2 bytes
The size required for RWr (remote register) varies depending on the number of bar codes being
read. Reserve enough memory which can hold the maximum size of data used for one handshake
operation.
For the format to store the read result, refer to " D RWr (remote register)" (Page 9-7).
The sizes occupied by RX, RY, RWr, and RWw are determined as follows based on the combination
of the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic setting. Select an appropriate
combination so that the memory size shown above is ensured. 9

Selecting the size to be occupied
The sizes occupied by RX, RY, RWr, and RWw are determined as follows based on the combination of
the number of occupied stations and the extended cyclic setting. Select an appropriate combination
so that the memory size shown above is ensured.
When 2 stations are occupied When 3 stations are occupied When 4 stations are occupied
RX/RY ........................64 bits RX/RY ........................ 96 bits RX/RY ...................... 128 bits
1x setting
RWw/RWr................16 bytes RWw/RWr ............... 24 bytes RWw/RWr ............... 32 bytes
RX/RY ....................... 96 bits RX/RY ...................... 160 bits RX/RY ...................... 224 bits
2x setting
RWw/RWr................32 bytes RWw/RWr ............... 48 bytes RWw/RWr ............... 64 bytes
RX/RY ......................192 bits RX/RY ...................... 320 bits RX/RY ..................... 448 bits
4x setting
RWw/RWr................64 bytes RWw/RWr ............... 96 bytes RWw/RWr ............. 128 bytes
RX/RY ......................384 bits RX/RY ...................... 640 bits RX/RY ...................... 896 bits
8x setting
RWw/RWr..............128 bytes RWw/RWr ............. 192 bytes RWw/RWr ............. 256 bytes
* It is impossible to set the NX-50CL to only occupy one station because at least 12 bytes are required for
the input data buffer of the NX-50CL.
Memory allocation example

The example below assumes the following settings.
Memory allocation
Assume that the memory of the CC-Link master station is allocated as follows:
Refresh device for RX (remote input) : X1000
Refresh device for RWw (remote register) : D1000
Refresh device for RY (remote output) : Y1000
Refresh device for RWr (remote register) : D2000
Command operation
Assume that the following command is used:
T1 command......... Turns on a trigger input.
* When the AGC reading mode is used
9-9
z Data buffer size

Output data buffer
The size required for sending a command is 1 word (AGC reading mode).
The T1 command is assigned as follows.
Device Description Data format

D1000 $5431 $5431 = "T1" ASCII
Input data buffer
Determine the size required for reading the operation result by referring to " D RWr (remote
register)" (Page 9-7).
For example, reading one bar code of 10 digits results in the data being stored in the input data
buffer as follows.

D2000 $3030 Response code ($3030 = "00") ASCII
D2001 $0001 No. of read data packets ($0001) Binary
D2002 $0003 Offset value for read data table ($0003) Binary
D2003 $0010 No. of digits of read data ($0010) Binary
D2004 1st and 2nd digits of the data ASCII
9 D2005 3rd and 4th digits of the data ASCII
D2006 5th and 6th digits of the data ASCII

The size of the input control buffer and output control buffer is 16 points respectively including the
area reserved for the system.
Communication CC-Link master

NX-50CL
direction Device Description
Read control buffer RY Y1000 to Y100F Remote output
Read buffer
Read data buffer RWw D1000, D1001 Remote register
Write control buffer RX X1000 to X100F Remote input
Write buffer
Write data buffer RWr D2000 to D2008 Remote register
Input control Output control

Device Signal name Device Signal name
X1000 CMD_ACK Y1000 CMD_REQ
X1001 CMD_NAK Y1001 DATA_LATCH
X1002 ERROR1 Y1002
X1003 ERROR2 Y1003
X1004 DATA_STROBE Y1004 Reserved for
X1005 DATA_VALID Y1005 system
X1006 HEAD Y1006
X1007 OVER Y1007
X1008 OUT1 Y1008 OUT1
X1009 OUT2 Y1009 OUT2
X100A OUT3 Y100A OUT3
X100B OUT4 Y100B OUT4
X100C IN1 Y100C
X100D IN2 Y100D Reserved for
X100E Reserved for Y100E system
X100F system Y100F
9-10
Creating a ladder program
From the PLC, set the actions to "send a command" and "receive the operation result" by following the
steps below.
1 Store the command to be sent in RWw (remote register) of the CC-Link master station.
Store the "command" and "parameter" in RWw (remote register).
TIP For the storing address and format, refer to the following sections:
Storing address: "Memory configuration"-" B RWw (remote register)" (Page 9-5)
Storing format: "9-3 Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series" (Page 9-27)
2 Send the command.

Turn "CMD_REQ" (command run request) of RY (remote output) from off to on.
The command stored in step 1 is sent to the NX-50CL on the rising edge of "CMD_REQ".
"Memory configuration"-" A RY (remote output)" (Page 9-5)
3 Confirm that the command was sent properly.

When the NX-50CL receives the command, "CMD_ACK" of RX (remote input) turns on.
9
"Memory configuration"-" C RX (remote input)"(Page 9-6)

When "CMD_ACK" turns on, turn "CMD_REQ" of RY (remote output) from on to off to reset the
request.
When the NX-50CL runs the command and the result is stored in the buffer memory,
"DATA_VALID" of RX (remote input) turns on.
"Memory configuration"-" C RX (remote input)" (Page 9-6)
4 Receive the command result.

Turn "DATA_LATCH" of RY (remote output) from off to on.
The command result is sent to RWr (remote register) on the rising edge of "DATA_LATCH".
SR Series: "Memory configuration"-" D RWr (remote register)" (Page 9-7)
When the NX-50CL completes sending the command result, "DATA_STROBE" of RX (remote input)
turns on.
When "DATA_STROBE" turns on, turn "DATA_LATCH" of RY (remote output) from on to off to reset
the reception request.
9-11
TIP Sample program for the KV Series

The following is a sample program to control the BL-1300 Series with the KV-CL20 CC-Link
Master/Local Unit.
It is assumed that the KV-CL20 and NX-50CL are set as follows:
KV-CL20 NX-50CL
Starting No. of the remote output (RY) : R33600 Station No. :1
Starting No. of the remote input (RX) : R31600 No. of occupied stations : 2
Starting address of the remote register (RWw) : DM10500 Extended cyclic setting : 4x
Starting address of the remote register (RWr) : DM10300
Write trigger input on command.

MR000
DM10500. T=T1
MR000 MR000 MR010

RES SET
9 Write trigger input off command.

MR001
DM10500. T=T0
MR001 MR001 MR010

RES SET
Send a command. (Turn on CMD_REQ.)

R33600
MR010
R31600 MR010
RST
Control the data reading flag. (Turn on DATA_LATCH.)

R33601
R31605 R31604
B
Program processing of data written to DM10300 and later
END
ENDH
* This program is just a sample of the flag control to read data.

For a production environment, create a program by taking error handling and other possibilities into
account.
9-12
Timing diagram
Pass/Retry
The NX-50CL sends PASS to the head on the falling edge (ON OFF) of "DATA_LATCH" sent from
the CC-Link master station.
Master (remote output)

ON
CMD_REQ OFF
ON
DATA_LATCH OFF
Master (remote input)

ON
CMD_ACK OFF
ON
DATA_VALID OFF
ON
DATA_STO OFF
DATA D1 D2 D3
Head
SD
RD D1 D2 D3
No handshaking
9

Master (remote output)
ON
CMD_REQ OFF
ON
DATA_LATCH OFF
Master (remote input)

ON
CMD_ACK OFF
ON
DATA_VALID OFF
ON
DATA_STO OFF
DATA D2 D3 D4
Head
SD
RD D1 D2 D3 D4
Note
The NX-50CL retains up to two data packets received from the BL-1300 Series.
Consequently, if the NX-50CL receives the third data packet from the BL-1300 Series
before it transfers the previous packets to the CC-Link master station, the first packet is
discarded and only the latter two packets are buffered.
* Avoid this problem by setting the PASS/RETRY protocol to the head.
The NX-50CL does not exclusively control its command sending operation to the BL-1300
Series and the hardware trigger input from the terminal block. As a result, if the NX-50CL
sends a command to the BL-1300 Series but the BL-1300 Series recognizes a hardware
trigger input before recognizing the command from the NX-50CL, the command may be
ignored.
9-13
9-2 Control using DeviceNet
This section describes how to control the BL-1300 Series connected to the NX-50DN DeviceNet
Controller from a PLC across a network configured with DeviceNet.
TIP For more detailed information about the functions and settings of the DeviceNet master unit
or PLC, refer to the manual of the individual device.
Building a system using DeviceNet
To use the NX-50DN in a network using DeviceNet, ensure the following:

DeviceNet allows a maximum of 64 units to be connected.
The master, slave and configurator devices are included in these 64 units.
The maximum total cable extension length of DeviceNet is 500 m (at 125 kbits/s).
The table below shows the relationship between the communication speed and maximum cable
extension length.
Communication Maximum network Branch line Total branch line Power supply
Cable type
speed extension length length length capacity
500 kbits/s 100 m 36 m
9 Thick cable 250 kbits/s 250 m 78 m 8A
125 kbits/s 500 m 156 m
6m
500 kbits/s 100 m 36 m

Thin cable 250 kbits/s 100 m 78 m 3A
125 kbits/s 100 m 156 m
The NX-50DN must be connected with a dedicated 5-core cable complying with the DeviceNet
standards.
The connection using the other type of cable is not guaranteed.
Be sure to connect termination resistors at both ends of the trunk line.
Set the terminating resistance switch to on when the NX-50DN is connected at the end of the trunk
line.
For details of the terminating resistance switch, refer to "NX-50 Series" (Page1-11).
Do not connect any devices other than DeviceNet products to the communication channel.
Otherwise, proper communication may be prevented due to signal reflection.
Provide a class D ground at only one point in the network. If a complete class D ground cannot be
made, do not connect "FG" and "V-" of the communication power supply unit to avoid noise
interference.
Do not ground the shielded cable at more than one point in the network.
9-14
Setting the NX-50DN
Use AutoID Navigator to set the parameters of the NX-50DN according to the DeviceNet master unit
to be used.
This section describes only the settings of the DeviceNet-related parameters of the NX-50DN.
TIP For other setting details of the NX-50DN, refer to "AutoID Navigator User's Manual" and
"NX-50 Series Operation Manual".
For setting the DeviceNet master unit, refer to the manual of the device used as the
DeviceNet master unit.
DeviceNet setting parameters
Use AutoID Navigator to specify the following parameters:
Slave ID (ID) : Specify the ID number of the NX-50DN. (0 to 63)

Baud rate : Specify the baud rate according to the setting of the master unit.
Selectable options are: 125k, 250k, and 500 k (bit/s).
Write size : Set the size according to the command sent to the BL-1300 Series.
The BL-1300 Series uses one byte for a command. If you disable the AGC
function and specify parameter banks to read bar codes, another byte is
required.
"Memory size calculation" (Page 9-21)
Read size : Set the size according to the number of digits of bar codes read with the
BL-1300 Series.
TIP From AutoID Navigator, you can output the settings of the NX-50DN as an EDS file.
Use this file to register the settings of the NX-50DN with the master unit.
9-15
DeviceNet operation and memory configuration
On DeviceNet, the NX-50DN operates as a slave of the DeviceNet master unit connected with a
network cable.
The buffer memory of the NX-50DN and the link memory of the DeviceNet master unit are linked as
shown in "Memory configuration" below.
Perform setting and programming to control the BL-1300 Series according to this memory configuration
( "Setting and programming" (Page 9-20)).
Memory configuration
The buffer memory of the NX-50DN is linked as follows:
Slave Master
9
BL-1300 Series Host PLC DeviceNet

NX-50CL Master unit
Buffer memory
Link memory
Read control buffer A Output control buffer
Read buffer
Read data buffer B Output data buffer
Write control buffer C Input control buffer
Write buffer
Write data buffer D Input data buffer
9-16
A Output control buffer

The output control buffer stores control signals sent from the DeviceNet master unit to the NX-50DN.
It controls data communication between the Read/Write data buffer of the NX-50DN and the input/
output data buffer of the DeviceNet master unit. It also controls the operation of OUT terminals 1
through 4.
Signal DeviceNet master

NX-50DN
direction Offset Signal name Description
Sends a command stored in the output data
buffer on the rising edge of the signal (OFF
Bit 0 CMD_REQ (0) ON (1)).
The sending ends on the falling edge of the
signal (ON (1) OFF (0)).
Reads the data stored in the NX-50DN on the
rising edge of the signal (OFF (0) ON (1)).
Bit 1 DATA_LATCH
The reading ends on the falling edge of the
Read control signal (ON (1) OFF (0)).
buffer n Bit 2
2 bytes (16 bits) : - Reserved for system
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
OUT1
OUT2
Turns on/off the OUT1 terminal.*1
9
ON: 1

Bit 10 OUT3 OFF: 0
Bit 11 OUT4 Turns on/off the OUT4 terminal.*1
Bit 12
: - Reserved for system
Bit 15
n : The starting address of the output area. The address varies depending on the memory allocation in the DeviceNet
master.
*1: This operation is effective only when the output terminal of the NX-50DN is set to bus master status.

The output data buffer is an area which stores a "command" sent from the DeviceNet master unit to
the NX-50DN.

NX-50DN
Stores the name of High-order 1 character
n +1 CMD
the command. Low-order 2 characters
Read data buffer
Stores the parameter High-order 1 character
n +2 PRM1*2
(bank No.). Low-order 2 characters
*2: This signal is effective only when the AGC reading of the BL-1300 Series is disabled.
9-17
C Input control buffer

The input control buffer stores the status of the NX-50DN.

NX-50DN
Turns on when the NX-50CL successfully
Bit 0 CMD_ACK
receives a command.
Turns on when the NX-50CL receives an invalid
Bit 1 CMD_NAK
command.
Turns on when a command error occurred
(invalid command).
Bit 2 ERROR1*1
Turns on when a command error occurred
(invalid parameter).
Bit 3 ERROR2*1
Bit 4 DATA_STROBE Turns on when data transmission is complete.
Write control
buffer N Bit 5 DATA_VALID Turns on when send data exists.
2 bytes (16 bits) ON: The head is
9 Bit 6 HEAD
Indicates the head
connection status.
connected.
OFF: The head is not
connected.
Bit 7 OVER Turns on when OVER is received from the head.

Bit 8 OUT1
Bit 9 OUT2
Bit 10 OUT3
Shows the ON/OFF status of the terminal.
Bit 11 OUT4
Bit 12 IN1
Bit 13 IN2
Bit 14
- Reserved for system
Bit 15
N : The starting address of the input area. The starting address varies depending on the memory allocation
in the DeviceNet master.
*1: ERROR1 and ERROR2 turn on at the same time with CMD_NAK.
9-18
D Input data buffer

The input data buffer stores the operation result received from the NX-50DN.
Signal Device Net master unit

NX-50DN
direction Input data buffer Description
Low-order
RWr ( n +0) Write control buffer
High-order
Low-order "00": Data received
RWr ( n +1) Response code
High-order "E9": DM memory over*1
Low-order
RWr ( n +2) No. of read data packets*2
High-order
Low-order Offset value for the 1st read data table
RWr ( n +3)
High-order [A]*3
Low-order Offset value for the 2nd read data table
RWr ( n +4)
High-order [B]*4
Low-order Offset value for the 3rd read data table
RWr ( n +5)
High-order [C]*4
: : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +A) No. of digits of the 1st read data *5
High-order
Low-order 1st digit data
RWr ( n +A+1)
High-order 2nd digit data
Low-order 3rd digit data
9
RWr ( n +A+2) 1st symbol data

Write data Low-order 5th digit data
RWr ( n +A+3)
buffer High-order 6th digit data
: : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +B) No. of digits of the 2nd read data*5
High-order
RWr ( n +B+1)
RWr ( n +B+2) 2nd symbol data
RWr ( n +B+3)
: : :
Low-order
RWr ( n +C) No. of digits of the 3rd read data*5
High-order
RWr ( n +C+1)
RWr ( n +C+2) 3rd symbol data
RWr ( n +C+3)
: : :
n : Address of the input data buffer assigned in the master unit (It varies depending on the memory
allocation in the NX-50DN).
*1: Check that the settings under "Setting the data size" on page 9-21 have been configured correctly.
*2: Since the number of data received in the single label read mode and multi-label read mode 1 is 1, the
number of read data is always 1. In other read modes, it varies according to the number of data
received.
*3: The value is always A=3 in the single label read mode and multi-label read mode 1. In other read
modes, it varies according to the number of data received.
*4: Used only in multi-label read mode 3. When another mode is selected, this item is deleted and the
subsequent items are moved up.
*5: When the data addition function of the BL-1300 Series is used, this number includes the digits of the
specified additional data.
9-19
Setting and programming
The following setting and programming steps are required to use DeviceNet to control the NX-50DN.
Setting the communication Set the communication speed and slave ID (node address) of the
parameters NX-50DN.
Setting the data size Calculate and set the data size required for communication.
"Setting the data size" (Page 9-21)
On the DeviceNet master unit, set the link area for the NX-50DN.
Create a program according to the settings.
Create a program to send a command from the host PLC and to

Ladder program
receive the operation result data of the command using handshaking
signals.
9 Program run
Setting the communication parameters
Set the communication speed and slave ID (node address) of the NX-50DN by using AutoID
Navigator or setting commands.
AutoID Navigator: "Setting the NX-50DN" (Page 9-15)
Command setting: "Network (NX-50DN)" on page 5-14 in "NX-50 Series Operation Manual"
[Slave ID (MAC ID)]

Specify the same slave ID (node address) as the one assigned to the NX-50DN in DeviceNet.
[Baud rate]
Confirm the same baud rate (communication speed) as the one specified in DeviceNet.
For the setting of the DeviceNet master unit, refer to the manual of the device used as the DeviceNet
master unit.
9-20
Set the size of the input/output data linked to DeviceNet by using AutoID Navigator or setting
commands.
AutoID Navigator: "Setting the NX-50DN" (Page 9-15)
Command setting: "Network (NX-50DN)" on page 5-14 in "NX-50 Series Operation Manual"
[Writing size]
Enter the size of write data handled during one handshake operation.
Four bytes for the command and parameter as well as two bytes for the control buffer for
handshaking are reserved as the size of [Output data].
[Reading size]
Enter the size of read data handled during one handshake operation.
Eight bytes for the additional information and two bytes for the control buffer for handshaking are
reserved as the size of [Input data].
Memory size calculation 9

A single unit of the NX-50DN occupies the following sizes in the memory of the DeviceNet master

unit.
Description Size
A Output control buffer Control data 2 bytes (16 bits)
Control command 2 bytes
Parameter 2 bytes
C Input control buffer Control data 2 bytes (16 bits)
Response code 2 bytes
No. of read symbols 2 bytes
D Input data buffer 2 bytes or more (Varies depending on the
Data offset value
number of read symbols)
Number of read data digits 2 bytes
Writing size
The size of write data varies depending on the command and parameters to be used. Reserve enough
memory which can hold the maximum size of data used for one handshake operation.
For the memory size required for issuing each command, refer to "9-3 Control Commands of the
BL-1300 Series" (Page 9-27).
For the configuration of the output data buffer, refer to " B Output data buffer" (Page 9-17).
Maximum size of writing data Control Command + parameter Output data buffer Output control buffer Output buffer size
(1) (2) (1)+(2) (3) (1)+(2)+(3)
0 4 4 2 6
(Unit: Byte)
9-21
Reading size
The size of read data varies depending on the command and parameters to be used. Reserve enough
memory to hold the maximum size of data used for one handshake operation. For the format used to
store the command result, refer to " B Output data buffer" (Page 9-17).
No. of BL-1300 Additional Input data Input control Input buffer AutoID Navigator settings
reading digits information, etc. buffer buffer size Input data
(1) (2) (1)+(2) (3) (1)+(2)+(3) Reading size
size
6 8 14 2 16 2 16
12 8 20 2 22 8 22
20 8 28 2 30 16 30
28 8 36 2 38 24 38
36 8 44 2 46 32 46
52 8 60 2 62 48 62
68 8 76 2 78 64 78
100 8 108 2 110 96 110
132 8 140 2 142 128 142
190 8 198 2 200 186 200
(Unit: Byte)
9 Memory allocation example

The example below assumes the following settings.
Memory allocation
Assume that the memory of the DeviceNet master unit is allocated as follows:
Starting address of the output area: DM10700
Starting address of the input area: DM10500
Command operation
Assume that the following command is used:
T1 command......... Turns on a trigger input.
* When the AGC reading mode is used
z Data buffer size

Output data buffer
The size required for sending a command is 1 word (in AGC reading mode only).
The T1 command is assigned as follows
.

DM10701 $5431 $5431 = "T1" ASCII
9-22
Input data buffer

Determine the size required for reading the operation result by referring to " D Input data buffer"
(Page 9-19).
For example, reading one bar code of 10 digits results in the data stored in the input data buffer as
follows. Consequently, users may decide that you need 9 words.

DM10501 $3030 Response code ($3030 = "00") ASCII
DM10502 $0001 No. of read data packets ($0001) Binary
DM10503 $0004 Offset value for read data table ($0004) Binary
DM10504 $0010 No. of digits of read data (10 digits) ($0010) Binary
DM10505 1st and 2nd digits of the data ASCII
DM10506 3rd and 4th digits of the data ASCII
DM10507 5th and 6th digits of the data ASCII
The size of the input control buffer and output control buffer is 16 points respectively including the area
9
reserved for the system.
Communication Master (KV-DN20)

NX-50DN
direction Device Description

Read control buffer DM10700 Output control buffer
Read buffer Output area DM10701,
Read data buffer Output data buffer
DM10702
Write control buffer DM10500 Input control buffer
DM10501
Write buffer Input area
Write data buffer to Input data buffer
DM10509
Input control buffer Output control buffer

DM No. Bit Signal name DM No. Bit Signal name
0 CMD_ACK 0 CMD_REQ
1 CMD_NAK 1 DATA_LATCH
2 ERROR1 2
3 ERROR2 3
4 DATA_STROBE 4 Reserved for
5 DATA_VALID 5 system
6 HEAD 6
7 OVER 7
DM10500 DM10700
8 OUT1 8 OUT1
9 OUT2 9 OUT2
10 OUT3 10 OUT3
11 OUT4 11 OUT4
12 IN1 12
13 IN2 13 Reserved for
14 Reserved for 14 system
15 system 15
9-23
Creating a ladder program
From the PLC, set the actions to "send a command" and "receive the operation result" by following the
steps below.
1 Store the command to be sent in the output data buffer of the DeviceNet master unit.
Store the "command" and "parameter" in the output data buffer.
TIP For the storing address and format, refer to the following sections:
Storing address: "Memory configuration"-" B Output data buffer" (Page 9-10)
Storing format: "Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series" (Page 9-27)
2 Send the command.

Turn "CMD_REQ" (command run request) of the output control buffer from off to on.
The command stored in step 1 is sent to the NX-50DN on the rising edge of "CMD_REQ".
"Memory configuration"-" A Output control buffer" (Page 9-17)
3
9
Confirm that the command was sent properly.
When the NX-50DN receives the command, "CMD_ACK" of the input control buffer turns on.
"Memory configuration"-" C Input control buffer" (Page 9-18)
When "CMD_ACK" turns on, turn "CMD_REQ" of the output control buffer from on to off to reset the
request.
"Memory configuration"-" A Output control buffer" (Page 9-17)
When the NX-50DN run the command and the result is stored in the buffer memory, "DATA_VALID"
of input control buffer turns on.
"Memory configuration"-" C Input control buffer" (Page 9-18)
4 Receive the command result.

Turn "DATA_LATCH" of the output control buffer from off to on.
The command result is sent to the input data buffer on the rising edge of "DATA_LATCH".
With SR Series: "Memory configuration"-" D Input data buffer" (Page 9-19)
When the NX-50DN completes sending the command result, "DATA_STROBE" of the input control
buffer turns on.
When "DATA_STROBE" turns on, turn "DATA_LATCH" of the output control buffer from on to off to
reset the reception request.
"Memory configuration"-" B Output control buffer" (Page 9-17)
9-24
TIP Sample program for the KV Series

The following is a sample program to control the BL-1300 Series with the KV-DN20
DeviceNet Unit.
It is assumed that the KV-DN20 and NX-50DN are set as follows:
KV-DN20 NX-50DN
Link block 1UseType : DM Slave ID (MAC ID) : 1
IN area (Input control buffer) : DM10500 Output data size : 18 bytes
OUT area (Output control buffer) : DM10700 Input data size : 46 bytes
Write trigger input on command.

MR000
DM10701. T=T1
MR000 MR000 MR010

RES SET
Write trigger input off command.
9
MR001
DM10701. T=T0

MR001 MR001 MR010
RES SET
Send a command. (Turn on CMD_REQ.)

DM10700
MR010
B
#0
DM10500 MR010
B SET
#0
Control the data reading flag. (Turn on DATA_LATCH.)

DM10700
DM10500 DM10500
B B B
#5 #4
#1
Program processing of data written to DM10501 and later
END
ENDH
* This program is just a sample of flag control to read data.

For a production environment, create a program by taking error handling and other possibilities into
account.
9-25
Timing diagram
Pass/Retry
The NX-50DN sends PASS to the head on the falling edge (ON OFF) of "DATA_LATCH" sent from
the DeviceNet master unit.
Master (output control)

ON
CMD_REQ OFF
ON
DATA_LATCH OFF
Master (input control)

ON
CMD_ACK OFF
ON
DATA_VALID OFF
ON
DATA_STO OFF
DATA D1 D2 D3
Head
SD
RD D1 D2 D3
9 No handshaking
Master (output control)

ON
CMD_REQ OFF
ON
DATA_LATCH OFF
Master (input control)

ON
CMD_ACK OFF
ON
DATA_VALID OFF
ON
DATA_STO OFF
DATA D2 D3 D4
Head
SD
RD D1 D2 D3 D4
Note
The NX-50DN retains up to two data packets received from the BL-1300 Series.
Consequently, if the NX-50DN receives the third data packet from the BL-1300 Series
before the DeviceNet master unit reads the previous packets, the first packet is discarded
and only the latter two packets are buffered.
* Avoid this problem by setting the PASS/RETRY protocol to the head.
The NX-50DN does not exclusively control its command sending operation to the BL-1300
Series and the hardware trigger input from the terminal block. As a result, if the NX-50DN
sends a command to the BL-1300 Series but the BL-1300 Series recognizes a hardware
trigger input before recognizing the command from the NX-50DN, the command may be
ignored.
9-26
9-3 Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series
This section lists the commands used to control the BL-1300 Series through CC-Link or DeviceNet.
List of the control commands of the BL-1300 Series
Refer to the table below to select the command to control the remote register of CC-Link or the output
data buffer of DeviceNet.
Operation Command Parameter 1*1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3

(2-byte ASCII) (Binary)
m
Trigger input on T1 - -
m = 0000 to 0007*2
Trigger input off T0 - - -
Trigger input on for preset
P1 - - -
data registration
Trigger input off for preset
P0 - - -
data registration
Clear buffer XC - - -
*1: In AGC reading mode, it is unnecessary to write parameters.
9
*2: "m" indicates the parameter bank No.
9-27
9-3 Control Commands of the BL-1300 Series
MEMO
9
9-28
10
Ethernet Communication
This chapter describes Ethernet communication using the BL-1300 Series
and N-L1.
10-1 Overview of the N-L1.............................................10-2

10-2 Setting the N-L1.....................................................10-6
10-3 Precautions for using the N-L1............................10-15
10-4 Troubleshooting of the N-L1 ................................10-16
10-1
10-1 Overview of the N-L1
The N-L1 is a communication unit used to transfer the read data sent from the BL-1300 Series to a
personal computer or PLC via Ethernet. This section describes the basic specifications and functions
of the N-L1.
Basic specifications
Connection
Connector type: RJ-45
The pin arrangement of the Ethernet connector port is as follows:
Signal
Pin No. Name Signal name
direction
(1)
(2) (1) TX+ Send signal High Output
(3) (2) TX- Send signal Low Output
(4)
(5) (3) RX+ Receive signal High Input
(6)
(7) (4) - Unused -
(8) (5) - Unused -
(6) RX- Receive signal Low Input
(7) - Unused -
(8) - Unused -
10 Use a "straight cable" to connect the N-L1 to a hub; and use a "cross cable" to connect the N-L1 to a
personal computer.
Hub
Straight cable
Cross cable
PC
Use a cable rated as Category 5 or higher. (Either of STP or UTP can be used.)
The maximum cable extension length is 100 m.
The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet).

CAUTION
Be sure to connect 24 VDC power supply to the power supply terminal of the N-L1.
Ethernet specifications
Automatic recognition of 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Protocol: TCP/IP, ICMP (ping), and telnet (setting)
TCP specifications
No. of connections which can be established simultaneously: 1
Both server and client operations supported
10-2
Operation of the N-L1
The N-L1 can be used as either a server or a client.

When you want to use the N-L1 as a client, you need to register the port number and IP address of
the device as follows.
When you use the N-L1 as a server, do not change the factory settings.
Setting/confirming the port number of the device to be connected

Set Command : f_pt=n (n = Port number of the device to be connected [0 to 65535])
Response : OK
Confirm Command : f_pt
Response : n
Setting/confirming the IP address of the device to be connected

Set Command : f_ip=a,b,c,d (a.b.c.d = IP address [0 to 255])
Response : OK
Confirm Command : f_ip
Response : a.b.c.d
* Send the commands above when the N-L1 is in the setting mode.
"10-2 Setting the N-L1" (Page 10-6) 10
* Even when set as a client, the N-L1 can be used as a server when it receives an establish
connection request from the host earlier.
Establishing connection
When used as a client, the N-L1 sends an establish connection request in the following two ways:
(1) When the N-L1 receives the read data from the BL-1300 Series while it is disconnected from the host
(2) Select the operation above with the setting command as necessary when the connection is not
yet established such as the period just after the N-L1 is turned on
Select the operation above with the setting command.
Setting/confirming the sending of an establish connection request as necessary

Set Command : conn=n (n = 0 or 1 [0: Not send, 1: Send])
Response : OK
Confirm Command : conn
Response : n
"10-2 Setting the N-L1" (Page 10-6)
Data transmission timing
The N-L1 sends the data received from the BL-1300 Series under the following conditions:
(1) When the data in the TCP send buffer of the N-L1 reaches the maximum size (256 bytes).
(2) When the preset time of the TCP transmission timing timer elapses
Set the TCP transmission timing timer with the following setting command.
10-3
Setting/confirming the TCP transmission timing timer

Set Command : timv=n (n = Preset time [1 to 100 ms])
Response : OK
Confirm Command : timv
Response :n
Keep Alive/Idle function
Keep Alive function

When no TCP communication has taken place for a certain period of time, the N-L1 sends a Keep
packet to the connected device to check whether the connection is still active. When the N-L1
receives the response to the Keep packet, it retains the established connection; when it does not
receive the response, it disconnects the connection.
Setting/confirming the Keep Alive function

Set Command : keep=n (n = 0 or 1 [0: Disable, 1: Enable])
10 Response : OK
Confirm Command : keep
Response : n
Idle function
When no TCP communication has taken place for a certain period of time, the N-L1 disconnects itself
from the connected device without checking the connection status.
Setting/confirming the Idle function

Set Command : idle=n (n = 0 or 1 [0: Disable, 1: Enable])
Response : OK
Confirm Command : idle
Response : n
Setting the timer for monitoring the period of no communication

Specify the period of no communication to activate the Keep Alive/Idle function with the following
command.
Set Command : timr=n (n = 1 to 60 minutes)
Response : OK
Confirm Command : timr
Response : n
10-4
Notice on the setting of the Keep Alive/Idle function

It is impossible to enable both of the Keep Alive function and Idle function simultaneously.
Function Keep Alive function Idle function

Enable Disable
Setting
Disable Enable
Select either of the settings above.
* When the N-L1 is in the setting mode receives idle=1 after keep=1 is set, it returns NG.
Also, when the N-L1 receives keep=1 after idle=1 is set, it returns NG.
10
10-5
10-2 Setting the N-L1
This section describes how to set the N-L1.
Setting procedure
Before using the N-L1, you need to set parameters for the Ethernet connection as well as for the BL-
1300 Series connection.
The setting is done via telnet (through port 23).
Preparation
Make the following preparations before you begin to set the N-L1.
Required Items
Personal computer (PC)
LAN cable (Cross cable of Category 5 or higher)
N-L1
PC Preparation
10 Change the network settings of the PC that is being used for setting.
Initial setting values of the N-L1
IP address 192.168.0.1
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Set the PC according to the network setting shown above.

Setting of the PC
192.168.0.XXX
IP address
(XXX = 002 to 254)
N-L1 Preparation
While the NL-1 is turned off, set the RESET/RUN switch to the RESET side.
Do not turn on the N-L1 until you connect it to the PC with a cable.
* When the N-L1 is turned on with the RESET/RUN switch set to RESET, it starts the initial setting.
10-6
Setting the N-L1
telnet connection
Start a telnet application to set the N-L1.
The typical methods to establish a telnet connection are as follows:
Command prompt
HyperTerminal
Terateram
This section describes the method to establish connection by using a command prompt.
1 Start a command prompt and establish telnet connection to the N-L1.

Command : telnet 192.168.0.1
10
2 When the telnet connection is successfully established, a password prompt appears. Enter the
following password.
Password : RAS (half-width upper-case characters)
Note
The password you typed ("RAS") is not shown on the command prompt screen.
3 When you have logged in successfully, a message similar to the following is displayed.
10-7
4 Enter the setting values.

For example, to change the IP address of the N-L1 to "192.168.0.100", type the following.
Command : l_ip=192.168.0.100
Response : OK
"N-L1 setting command" (Page 10-13)

5 To save the settings in the N-L1, send a "save" command.
Command : save
Response : OK
10
Note
When the save command is sent, the settings are saved in the EEP-ROM.
It may take one or two seconds before you receive the OK response after the save
command is sent.
6 To finish the setting, type "exit" and terminate the telnet connection.
10-8
This completes the setting of the N-L1.

Turn off the N-L1 once, set the RESET/RUN switch to the RUN side, and turn on the unit again. The N-
L1 starts up with the new setting.
CAUTION After the setting has been changed, users can still change the setting
through the telnet connection using the new IP address.
If you forget the new IP address, you can reset the N-L1 to the factory setting
by turning off the unit, setting the RESET/RUN switch to RESET, and then
turning on the unit. Set the N-L1 again from the beginning.
If no entry is made for 60 seconds after the password has been entered, the
telnet connection will be disconnected. When this occurs, you need to
establish the telnet connection again.
Checking the connection of the N-L1
Check that the N-L1, which you have changed the settings on, can connect properly to the PC.
Send a "ping" command to the N-L1 according to the following example.

Example:
10
To send a ping command to the N-L1 of which you changed the IP address to "192.168.0.100"
Command : ping 192.168.0.100
When connection is successfully established, a response screen similar to the screen above
appears.
10-9
Setting command list
The tables below lists the commands used to set the N-L1.
Ethernet-related settings
Function Command Response Description Initial value
l_ip = a.b.c.d = IP address
Change OK
a.b.c.d a: 0 to 255
IP address settings a.b.c.d =
b: 0 to 255
of the N-L1 192.168.0.1
Confirm l_ip a.b.c.d c: 0 to 255
d: 0 to 255
Change mask = n OK n = 0 to 31
* Specify the value as bit length.
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0=24 n = 24
settings Confirm mask n
255.255.0.0=16
255.0.0.0=8
gwip = a.b.c.d = Default gateway address
Change OK
a.b.c.d a: 0 to 255
Default gateway a.b.c.d =
10 settings
Confirm gwip a.b.c.d
b: 0 to 255
c: 0 to 255
0.0.0.0
d: 0 to 255
Change l_pt = n OK n = 0 to 65535

Port number of the * Do not specify port number 23
n = 9004
N-L1 Confirm l_pt n because it is used for the telnet
connection.
f_ip = a.b.c.d = IP address of the host
Change OK
IP address setting a.b.c.d a: 0 to 255
a.b.c.d =
of the connected b: 0 to 255
0.0.0.0
device Confirm f_ip a.b.c.d c: 0 to 255
d: 0 to 255
Port number setting Change f_pt = n OK
of the connected n = 0 to 65535 n = 9004
Confirm f_pt n
device
Send establish Change conn = n OK n = 0 or 1
connection request 0: Not send n=0
Confirm conn n
as necessary 1: Send
Change keep = n OK n = 0 or 1
Keep/Alive function
0: Disable n=0
settings Confirm keep n
1: Enable
Change idle = n OK n = 0 or 1
Idle function
0: Disable n=0
settings Confirm idle n
1: Enable
Wireless monitor Change timr = n OK
n = 1 to 60 (Unit: 1 minute) n = 60
timer settings Confirm timr n
10-10
RS-232C-related settings
Change mode = n OK n = 0 or 1
0: Disable
RTS/CTS protocol 1: Enable
n=0
settings Confirm mode n * When connecting the BL-1300
Series, be sure to enable this
protocol.
Change bps = n OK n = 13 to 19
13: 4800
14: 7200
15: 9600
16: 19200
Baud rate settings 17: 38400 n = 15
Confirm bps n
18: 57600
19: 115200
* When connecting the BL-1300
series, do not set its baud rate to
31500.
Change bits = n OK n = 7 or 8
Data length settings 7: 7 bits n=8
Confirm
Change
bits
pari = n
n
OK
8: 8 bits
n = 0, 1, or 2
10
Parity enable/ 0: None
n=0
disable setting Confirm pari n 1: Even
2: Odd
Change stop = n OK n = 0 or 1
Stop bit length
0: 1 bit n=0
settings Confirm stop n
1: 2 bits
TCP transmission Change timv = n OK
n = 1 to 100 (Unit: ms) n = 100
timing settings Confirm timv n
Other settings
Change pswaaaaaaaa OK aaaaaaaa: 8 bytes or less
Change/check * You can change the password
RAS
password settings Confirm psw aaaaaaaa which should be confirmed after
the telnet connection.
Check MAC address The MAC address of the N-L1 is
madr OK
settings displayed.
Reset the specified settings.
Reset setting data reset OK * The setting values saved in the -
EEP-ROM are not reset.
The specified settings are saved
Save settings save OK -
in the EEP-ROM.
Send ping to the connected
device that had its IP address set
Send ping to the connected
Ping OK with f_ip. (4 times) -
device
Interval_time = 3 seconds
Time out = 5 seconds
Complete setting exit OK - -
10-11
System configuration using the N-L1
The N-L1 connects the BL-1300 Series to a PC via a hub.

* When the N-L1 is used as a client.
Typical system configuration
PC (Server)
LAN cable (straight)

Ethernet
10 Ethernet switch /HUB

LAN cable (straight)
Ethernet
N-L1 (Client 1) N-L1 (Client 2)
IP: 192.168.0.100 IP: 192.168.0.101

Port: 60000 Port: 60001
Head cable Head cable

RS-232C RS-232C
BL-1300 BL-1300
10-12
PC and BL-1300 Series settings

This manual assumes that the PC and BL-1300 Series are set as follows:
Personal computer (PC)

IP address 192.168.0.2
Port No. 50000, 50001
BL-1300
Communication protocol RTS/CTS protocol enabled
Data length 8 bits
Parity None
N-L1 setting command

To connect the PC and BL-1300 Series as shown in the typical system configuration, you need to set
the N-L1 with the following commands.
Host IP address
Setting item N-L1 (Client 1) N-L1 (Client 2) 10
f_ip = 192.168.0.2 f_ip = 192.168.0.2
192.168.0.2
Host Port No.
f_pt = 50000 f_pt = 50001
50000, 50001
Subnet mask
mask = 24 mask = 24
255.255.255.0
Set 192.168.0.100. Set 192.168.0.101.
N-L1 IP address
l_ip = 192.168.0.100 l_ip = 192.168.0.101
N-L1 port number
Set 60000. Set 60001.
(Port 23 cannot be set because it is
l_ip = 60000 l_ip = 60001
used for telnet)
RS-232C communication protocol
mode = 1 mode = 1
RTS/CTS enabled
Baud rate
bps = 19 bps = 19
115200 bits/s
Data length
bit = 8 bit = 8
8 bits
Parity
pari = 0 pari = 0
None
Stop bit length
stop = 0 stop = 0
1 bit
TCP segment transmission timing
settings timv = 1 timv = 1
1 ms
* When the N-L1 is used as a client.
10-13
Sample screen when the setting commands are sent
10
10-14
10-3 Precautions for using the N-L1
Read the following precautions before using the N-L1.
Precautions for the BL-1300 Series
Baud rate communication parameter

The BL-1300 Series cannot be used with the following baud rate settings.
600 bits/s, 1200 bits/s, 2400 bits/s, and 31500 bits/s
RTS/CTS protocol
The RTS/CTS protocol of the BL-1300 Series must be enabled.
Precautions for the N-L1
Precautions for telnet connection

If the N-L1 does not receive a command for 60 seconds after receiving the last command, it will
disconnect the telnet connection automatically.
During setting, limit the interval between the setting commands to 60 seconds or less.
Port number setting of the N-L1 (f_ip command)

Since port number 23 is used for the telnet connection, do not specify 23 with the f_ip command.
10
Keep/Alive and Idle_Timer functions setting
When you enabled the Keep/Alive function, you cannot enable the Idle_Timer function.
When you enabled the Idle_Timer function, you cannot enable the Keep/Alive function.
save and reset commands

When the save command is sent, the settings are saved in the EEP-ROM.
The reset command is used to reset the setting values before they are saved in the EEP-ROM.
To reset the setting values saved in the EEP-ROM to the default settings, you need to turn off the N-L1
once, set the RESET/RUN switch to the RESET side, turn on the N-L1 again, establish the telnet
connection, and then send the SAVE command.
MAC address format

The MAC address has been written in the following format.
MAC address = a-b-c-d-e-f
where, a: 00 to FF, b: 00 to FF, c: 00 to FF, d: 00 to FF, e: 00 to FF, and f: 00 to FF.
10-15
10-4 Troubleshooting of the N-L1
This section lists the possible problems which you may encounter during the use of the N-L1 and
countermeasures.
Communication fails.
Check the Ethernet communication status between the N-L1 and the connected device.
Check that the LAN cable is connected properly.
You must use a cross cable to connect the N-L1 to a personal computer.
Ensure that a straight cable is not used.
To check the network path to the connected device and the network configuration, connect to the
N-L1 with telnet, send the "ping" command and check the response. When Time_out is returned,
check that the IP address of the device connected with the N-L1 and the IP address set to the N-L1
with f_ip are the same.
To check the network path to the N-L1, send "ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" (where XXX is the IP address
set to the N-L1 with l_ip).
If the IP address of the N-L1 is unknown, set the DIP switch of the N-L1to RESET, connect to the N-
L1 with telnet, and then set the N-L1 again.
Check the communication between the BL-1300 Series and the N-L1.
Read a bar code with the BL-1300 Series and confirm that the communication status LED of the N-
L1 flashes properly. If the LED does not flash, confirm that the same communication parameters
10 are set to the BL-1300 Series and N-L1.
Note
When connecting the BL-1300 Series to the N-L1, be sure to set the RTS/CTS protocol
setting of the BL-1300 Series to "Enable".

The N-L1 only supports TCP socket communication for Ethernet communication. You cannot
use the PLC link function.
Does not turn on.

Confirm that the power LED of the N-L1 is lit. If it is not lit, check that the 24 VDC power supply
cable is properly connected.
Note
The N-L1 does not support PoE (Power over Ethernet). Be sure to connect 24 VDC power
supply to the power supply terminal of the N-L1.
10-16
Appendix
The appendix contains information such as the specifications, reading
characteristics, dimensions, and troubleshooting techniques.
1 BL-1300 Series Specifications ............................... A-2

2 N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications ............................... A-9
3 NX-50 Series Specifications ................................. A-10
4 Dimensions diagram ............................................ A-12
5 General Troubleshooting ...................................... A-17
6 CODE93 Specifications........................................ A-19
7 CODE128 Specifications...................................... A-20
8 ITF/2of5/COOP2of5 Specifications....................... A-21
9 Concept of Bar Code Position.............................. A-23
10 Checksum Calculation Method ............................ A-25
11 ASCII Code Table ................................................. A-27
12 Setup Parameter List ............................................ A-28
13 Default Setting List ............................................... A-32
A-1
1 BL-1300 Series Specifications
Specifications
General specifications
BL- BL- BL-1300 BL- BL- BL- BL- BL-
Model
1300 1301 HA 1301HA 1350HA 1351HA 1370 1371
High-resolution,
Type Standard High-resolution Long-distance
side-scanning
Scanning direction Front Side Front
Light source Visible red semiconductor laser (Wavelength: 660nm)
Output 85 W
Pulse duraion 112 s
Laser Class
(IEC60825-1,FDA(CDRH) Part 1040.10)
Scan method Single Raster Single Raster Single Raster Single Raster
Focal distance 120 mm 90 mm 65 mm 230 mm
65 to 500 mm 45 to 270 mm 40 to 250 mm 160 to 600 mm
Reading distance (When narrow bar (When narrow bar (When narrow bar (When narrow bar
width is 1.0 mm) width is 0.5 mm) width is 0.5 mm) width is 1.0 mm)
Reading bar width 0.125 mm min. 0.08 mm min. 0.15 mm min.
339 mm 189 mm 201 mm 404 mm
(When distance is (When distance is (When distance is (When distance is
Maximum reading label
350 mm and 189 mm and 175 mm and 350 mm and
width
narrow bar width is narrow bar width is narrow bar width is narrow bar width is
1.0 mm) 0.5 mm) 0.5 mm) 1.0 mm)
PCS 0.4 or more
Scan count
Appendix
500 to 1300 scans/second (Selectable in the unit of 100 scans)

CODE39, ITF, Industrial 2of5, Standard 2of5, COOP2of5, NW-7/Codabar, CODE128,
Supported codes
GS1-128 (EAN-128), CODE93, UPC/EAN, GS1 DataBar (RSS)
Reading digit 74 digits max. (148 digits max. for CODE128 with start character C)
Enclosure rating IP65
Usable degree of
Sunlight: 10,000 lx, Incandescent lamp: 6,000 lx
Environment resistance
ambient light
Ambient
0 to 45C
temperature
Storage ambient
-20 to 60C
temperature
Relative humidity 35 to 85% (No condensation)
Operating
No dust or corrosive gas present
atmosphere
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude in X, Y and Z directions, 2 hours respectively
Power supply
5 V DC5%
Rating
voltage
Current
400 mA max.
consumption
Weight Approx. 115 g Approx. 130 g Approx. 115 g
* To comply with UL/IEC60950-1, use the limited power source (LPS) defined in UL/IEC60950-1.
* The internal settings of the main unit are written into the internal memory area. (Rewritable 100,000 times)
A-2
I/O specifications
Input terminal 2 (IN1, IN2), non-voltage input (contact, solid-state)

Output type 4 (OUT1 to OUT4), NPN open collector
Output Rated load 24 V DC, 30 mA
terminal Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage at ON 0.5 V max.
Transmission method EIA RS-232C compliant
Communication rate 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 31250, 38400, 57600, 115200 bits/s
Serial Synchronization Start-stop
interface Data length 7/8 bits
Stop bit length 1 bit/2 bits
Parity check None/even/odd
Raster width specification

The raster scan type model scans multiple positions of a bar code by swinging the laser beam up
and down. Thus, a bar code can be read even if it has stains or voids.
For the height of a raster scan (raster width), note the table below.
Model Reading distance Raster height

BL-1301 120 mm 7.32.0 mm
BL-1301HA 90 mm 5.71.6 mm
BL-1351HA 65 mm 5.51.5 mm
BL-1370 230 mm 13.4 3.7 mm
Appendix
Relationship between the narrow bar width and scan count
The minimum narrow bar width of the BL-1300 Series varies depending on the scan count setting as
shown in the table below.
500 scans/s 1300 scans/s

Model
Binary level Multi-level Binary level Multi-level
BL-1300/1301 0.125 0.15 0.19 0.25
BL-1300HA/1301HA 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.19
BL-1350HA/1351HA 0.08 0.125 0.125 0.19
BL-1370/1371 0.15 0.19 0.25 0.33
Binary level : A bar code consists of 2 levels of bar/space widths (thick or thin).
Example: CODE39, CODABAR, and ITF
Multi-level : A bar code consists of 4 levels of bar/space widths.
Example: CODE128, UPC/EAN, and GS1 Databar
* The ratio of bar/space widths of multi-level bar codes is 1:2:3:4. Using this method allows little tolerance
for differentiation.
Consequently, when reading multi-level bar codes, ensure that the narrow bar is one size wider than the
minimum reading bar width.
A-3
Reading range characteristics (Typical)
BL-1300/1301
Unit: mm
Reading distance Reading distance
Bar code type Narrow bar width
(500 scans/s) (1300 scans/s)
A CODE39 0.125 85 to 140 -
B CODE39 0.19 80 to 220 80 to 150
C CODE39 0.25 65 to 280 60 to 200
D CODE39 0.5 65 to 400 60 to 360
E CODE39 1.0 65 to 500 60 to 450
339 306
124 124
500 500
400 400
300 E 300
E
D
D
200 200
Appendix
C
B C
A B
100 100
Focal distance Focal distance
=120mm =120mm
200 100 0 100 200 200 100 0 100 200
The reading label width includes the right and left quiet zones (margins).
Even if a bar code is within the above range, reading may fail depending on the bar code quality.
Set the optimum reading position based on testing.
Measuring conditions:KEYENCE standard bar code (NB:WB = 1:2.5)
Mounting condition Skew: 15, Pitch/tilt: 0
A-4
BL-1300HA/1301HA
Unit: mm
A CODE39 0.08 6 to 80 -
B CODE39 0.125 60 to 140 55 to 90
C CODE39 0.19 50 to 190 55 to 140
D CODE39 0.25 45 to 210 55 to 170
E CODE39 0.5 45 to 270 55 to 260

189 182
96 96
68 68
250 250
200 200
E
E
150 150
D
C D
C
100 B 100
A B
Appendix
Focal distance 50 Focal distance 50
=90mm =90mm
100 50 0 50 100 100 50 0 50 100
Measuring conditions: KEYENCE standard bar code (NB:WB = 1:2.5)
A-5
BL-1350HA/1351HA
Unit: mm
A CODE39 0.08 45 to 60 -
B CODE39 0.125 40 to 120 45 to 75
C CODE39 0.19 40 to 170 45 to 120
D CODE39 0.25 40 to 190 45 to 150
E CODE39 0.5 40 to 250 45 to 240

201 194
96 96
72 72
250 250
200 200
E
150 150
E
D
C
100 100 D
B C
B
Appendix
50 A 50
=65mm =65mm
100 50 0 50 100 100 50 0 50 100
Mounting condition Skew/pitch/tilt: 0
A-6
BL-1370/1371
Unit: mm
A CODE39 0.15 205 to 250 -
B CODE39 0.19 190 to 330 -
C CODE39 0.25 180 to 380 190 to 230
D CODE39 0.5 170 to 500 160 to 400
E CODE39 1.0 160 to 600 160 to 500
404 339
227 227
180
600 600
500 500
400 400
E
D E
300 C 300
D
B
A
200 200 C
Appendix
=230 mm =230 mm
100 100
200 100 0 100 200 200 100 0 100 200
A-7
Angular characteristics (Typical)
Narrow bar 500 scans/s 1300 scans/s

Model
width Skew Pitch Tilt Skew Pitch Tilt
0.19 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 50 30 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 30 30
BL-1300/1301
0.5 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 60 40 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 60 40
BL- 1300HA/ 0.125 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 40 10 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 20 10
1301HA 0.25 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 55 25 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 50 20
BL- 1350HA/ 0.125 mm -80 to -30, -10 to +40 50 10 -80 to -30, -10 to +40 20 10
1351HA 0.25 mm -80 to -30, -10 to +40 60 25 -80 to -30, -10 to +40 50 20
0.33 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 50 25 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 40 20
BL-1370/1371
0.5 mm -60 to -10, +10 to +60 60 40 -60 to -10, +10 to +60 60 40
Measuring conditions Bar code : KEYENCE standard bar code

Reading distance BL-1300/1301 : 120 mm
BL-1300HA/1301HA : 90 mm
BL-1350HA/1351HA : 65 mm
BL-1370/1371 : 230 mm
Note The skew angle range of -10 to +10 (BL-1350HA/1351HA: -30 to -10) represents a
specular reflection region where bar codes cannot be read or erroneously read due to
specular reflection.
Be sure not to mount the BL-1300 Series at an angle within this range.
Appendix
<Skew>
BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA BL-1350HA/1351HA
0
0 - +
- +
15
<Pitch> <Tilt>
+
0 +
-
0
A-8
2 N-R2/R4/UB/L1 Specifications
Model N-R2 N-R4 N-UB N-L1
Power supply unit for bar coder reader 5 V DC5% (650 mA)
11 LEDs
(Power supply
status, data
9 LEDs transmission/
reception status,
Display (Power supply status, data transmission/ I/O terminal
reception status, I/O terminal status) status,
LINK status,
communication
rate)
Terminating resistance - 100 - 100
Ambient temperature 0 to 50C
Storage ambient temperature -20 to 60C
Environment
Relative humidity 35% to 85% (No condensation)

resistance
Operating atmosphere No dust or corrosive gas present

10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude inX, Y and Z directions,
Vibration
2 hours respectively
Power supply voltage 24 V DC (+10%/-20%)
Rating
Current consumption 380 mA max.
Approx. 135g
Weight Approx. 135 g (Excluding the Approx. 155 g
connector)
I/O specifications
No. of terminals 2 (IN1, IN2)
Input type Bidirectional voltage input
Input
Input maximum rating
Appendix
26.4 V DC
Terminal block
Minimum ON voltage 15 V DC
Maximum OFF current 1 mA
No. of terminals 4 (OUT1 to OUT4)
Output type Photo MOS relay output
Output
Output rated load 30 V DC, 100 mA

Leakage current at OFF 0.1 mA max.
Residual voltage at ON 1 V max.
Communication specifications
Connector 1 (12-pin round connector)
Communication standard RS-232C compliant
4800, 9600, 19200, 31250, 38400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600,
Communication rate
57600, 115200 bits/s 115200 bits/s
Head
Data length 7/8 bits
interface
Stop bit length 1 bit/2 bits
Hardware/software/none Hardware flow control
Flow control
selectable (Required)
1 (D-sub 1 (removable
Connector 1 (USB - Type B) 1 (RJ-45)
9-pin connector) 5-pin connector)
Switchable
between IEEEB02.3
USB 2.0
RS-232C RS-422A/RS-485 compliant
Host Communication standard (Full-Speed
compliant (Maximum 10BASE-T/
interface 12 Mbps)
connectable 100BASE-TX
units: 31)
15 m or less
Total extension length (including the 1.2 km or less 5 m or less 100 m or less
head cable)
A-9
3 NX-50 Series Specifications
Model NX-50RS NX-50CL NX-50DN

Major functions Relay (control, data), status indication, head test
3-digit 7-segment LED (ID display, setting display, status indication, etc.)
Display
LED (Head access status, head output status, network status)
Terminating resistance
100 110 121
(TERMINATOR)
Ambient
0C to +55C
temperature
Relative
Environmen 35% to 85% (No condensation)
humidity
t resistance
Operating
No dust or corrosive gas present
atmosphere
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 0.3 mm amplitude, 55 Hz to 500 Hz, 2G acceleration
Power supply
24 V DC (+5%/-10%)
voltage
Rating
Current
500 mA max. (varies depending on the head being connected)
consumption
EN61326 Class A (Europe), FCC Part 15B Class A (United States),
Applicable EMC
ICES-003 Class A Canada)
standards
Safety standards UL508 (United States), CAN/CSA22 No. 14 (Canada)
Weight Approx. 300 g (including the network connector)
I/O specifications
Appendix

No. of inputs 2 inputs each on NPN and PNP sides (NPN and PNP share the circuit.)
Function Control input (trigger/timing, preset), remote I/O input
Input type 24 V DC voltage input
Input maximum
Input
26.4 V DC
rating
Minimum ON
15 V DC
voltage
Terminal block
Maximum OFF
1 mA
current
No. of outputs 4 outputs each on NPN and PNP sides
Judgment output (OK, NG), error output (ERR), control output (ENB),
Function
remote I/O output
Output type NPN side: NPN open collector, PNP side: PNP open collector
Output
Output rated load 30 V DC, 100 mA max.

Leakage current
0.1 mA max.
at OFF
Residual voltage
1 V max.
at ON
A-10
3 NX-50 Series Specifications
Communication specifications

No. of connection
1 (network connector)
ports
Function Data I/O, control I/O
Network standard RS-485 CC-Link DeviceNet
Master unit certified
Master unit certified by
by ODVA
Master unit N-410 CLPA
(DeviceNet Conformance
(CC-Link Version 2.00)
Tested)
1.2 km or less 500 m or less
Total extension
1.2 km or less (depending on (depending on
length communication rate) communication rate)
Communication 600 to 115200 bits/s 156 kbits/s to 10 Mbits/s
125, 250, 500 kbits/s
rate (10 options) (5 options)
Network
connection Device type - Remote device station Generic
Transmission Half-duplex Half-duplex
Half-duplex
method (RS-485 compliant) (RS-485 compliant)
(CAN)
(Physical layer) KEYENCE protocol Broadcast polling
Data length 7/8 bits - -
Stop bit length 1/2 bits - -
Parity check None/even/odd - -
No. of occupied
1 2 to 4 1
stations
Power supply - - 11 to 25 V DC
Current 10 mA max.
- - (when 24 V network
consumption power supply is applied)
Appendix
No. of connection
1 (12-pin round connector)
ports
Communication
RS-232C compliant
Head standard
connection Connectable
RF-500, RF-550, BL-180, BL-500, BL-600, BL-700, BL-210RK
models
Total extension When the RF-500 Series is connected: 10 m or less,
length When the BL Series is connected: 3 m or less
No. of connection
1 (modular jack)
ports
Function Data I/O, control I/O, judgment output
Transmission
Full-duplex (RS-232C compliant)
method
PC Synchronization Start-stop
connection Transmission code ASCII, binary
Communication
9600, 19200, 38400, 76800,115200 bits/s
rate
Data length 7/8 bits
Stop bit length 1/2 bits
A-11
4 Dimensions diagram
BL-1300 Series
z Main unit (BL-1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/1370/1371)
(Unit: mm)
29.8
Laser
29.3
beam
16
31
Scanning
2 x M3 3.5 22.5 21
center
Depth: 4
33
40
23.5
3.5
15 min.
3.8
4.2
11.5 14.6
Cable length:
2m
z Main unit (BL-1350HA/1351HA)

Laser (Unit: mm)
beam 15
Appendix
18.7
17.6
41.6 Scanning
center
22 3.5 21
38.1
48
23.5
15 min min.
2 x M3
3.5
3.8
Depth: 4
4.2
11.5 Cable
6.5
48 length: 2 m
A-12
z Mounting bracket
* The bottom of the mounting bracket is covered with an insulating sheet. Do not peel off this sheet.
Front scanning type

Mounting bracket A Mounting bracket B (Unit: mm)
Laser
beam
2-R 2.65 6.5 3
15
7.8
6
5.3
59.6
26.5
40
5.5
43.4
3
R19
10
38.7
2.2
19.6
14
Laser beam
9
2-R 2.65 5.3
15
2-R 2.8 3 5.5 2-R 2.8 43.6
25
37.6
32.7
28.0
2.2
11.4
49.4
Side scanning type

(Unit: mm)
5.5 36
2-R 5.3 3 2-R 2.7
2.65
Appendix
5.3
3
11
38.5
18.7
21

15 21 1.6
41.6
67.6
19.6
2.2
48
A-13
N-R2
(Unit: mm)
44.2
45
41.8
R
40
28.3
35.8
122.3
4.2
(128.5)
N-R4
(Unit: mm)
44.2
45
41.8
28.3
R
40
Appendix
35.8
122.3
4.2
57.4
(128.5)
A-14
N-UB
(Unit: mm)
57 44.2
41.8
R
40
40.3
35.8
133.8
49.9
(128.5)
4.8
N-L1
(Unit: mm)
57 44.2
41.8
R
40
40.3
Appendix
35.8
133.8
49.9
(128.5)
4.8
A-15
NX-50 Series
(Unit: mm)
91.9
78.7
31.6
95 35.4
R4
0
95 4
(145)
Appendix
A-16
5 General Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs during operation of the BL-1300 Series, please check the following
troubleshooting list first.
If you cannot solve the problem, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
Bar codes cannot be read.
Check whether the laser is emitted.

When using any communication unit (NX-50 Series, N-R2/R4/UB/L1, or DV-90), check the wiring of
the power supply and trigger input.
When you send trigger inputs to the communication unit, confirm that the trigger input function is
properly assigned to the IN input terminal of the BL-1300 Series.
When no communication unit is used, confirm that the supplied power voltage and capacity is correct
(5 V DC5%, 400 mA max.). Also, check the wiring of the power supply and trigger input.
Note Connecting the power supply in reverse may damage the product.
If the BL-1300 Series does not operate, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
Check the bar code settings (type, code length, etc.).

Check the following parameters using AutoID Navigator.
Bar code type, code length (number of digits to be read)
Setting of the check digit validation (enabled or disabled)
Setting of the label reading direction
Appendix
Note When CODE39 or CODABAR is read, the start/stop characters and check digit are included
in the code length. As a result, you need to specify at least 3 digits as the minimum code
length for CODE39 or CODABAR.
Check the mounting distance and angle of the BL-1300 Series.

A bar code reader offers most stable reading when mounted at its focal distance from the target.
In addition, adjust the mounting angle so that the bar code reader is not positioned in the specular
reflection region (Front scanning type: -10 to +10, side scanning type: -25 to -5).
Check the bar code quiet zones (margins).

A bar code requires quiet zones which are at least 10 times wider than the narrow bar width on its
right and left ends.
If the quiet zones are insufficient, the bar code may not be read.
Check the bar code size.

The bar code label length is the total lateral length of a bar code including the right and left quiet
zones (margins).
The readable bar code length varies depending on the reading distance.
(Refer to "Reading range characteristics (Typical)" (Page A-4).)
When the raster scan type model is used, bar codes with short height may produce a low reading
ratio because not all laser beams scanned the bar code.
If this is the case, increasing the reading time enables stable reading.
A-17
5 General Troubleshooting
Check the printing quality of the bar code.

A bar code with voids, stains, faded or blurred sections may not be read correctly.
Bar codes printed with dot matrix or ink jet printers are prone to these types of problems.
Check whether the transmitter and receiver are clean.

If moisture, oil, or dust adheres to the transmitter or receiver, wipe it off with a dry or
alcohol-moistened soft cloth.
Reading ratio test mode is not 100%.
Check the items listed in "Bar codes cannot be read" section above.
Note The reading ratio indicates the number of acceptable readings during 100 scans of a bar
code. If a bar code has spots or voids, the reading ratio decreases.
Even if the reading ratio is 20%, this means that 2 readings are acceptable during 10
scans. Therefore, if the decode match count is set to 2, the bar code can be read. The
read operation is not affected if the scan time for the bar code is set long enough.
The setting data cannot be sent/received using AutoID Navigator.

Appendix
Is the BL-1300 Series properly registered with AutoID Navigator?

To send/receive the setting data using AutoID Navigator, you need to select the BL-1300 Series
properly and update the connection before sending the setting data.
(Refer to "Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation" (Page 4-1).)
Check the a proper connection cable is used between the BL-1300 Series
(dedicated communication unit) and the PC. Also check if any cables are
disconnected.
Note AutoID Navigator cannot directly communicate with the BL-1300 via the N-R4 or N-L1.
When you want to set the BL-1300 from the PC, print out the batch-setting bar code and
read it with the BL-1300 Series, or use the N-R2 or N-UB to send the setting data to the
BL-1300 and then reconnect the N-R4 or N-L1.
Is power supplied to the BL-1300 Series or dedicated communication unit?
Communication using the PLC link, field network, or Ethernet fails.
Refer to the corresponding section in this manual.

"Chapter 8 PLC Link" (Page 8-1)
"Chapter 9 Field Network Communication" (Page 9-1)
"Chapter 10 Ethernet Communication" (Page 10-1)
A-18
6 CODE93 Specifications
Code length setting
The start/stop codes and check digit are not included in the code length, or the number of digits to
be read.
Data transmission
The start/stop codes and check digit are not sent.
The control codes are sent as they are.
Note
Do not use CODE93 with control codes when using a multi-drop link. This may cause
communication errors.

When "!" or "?" is used in preset data, it functions as the special character "!" or "?" which allows
flexible verification of the preset data ( Page 3-6). CODE93, however, can be used to convert all
ASCII codes into bar code data. Consequently, "!" and "?" themselves may be used as bar code
data.
If you want to register "!" or "?" as plain preset data, register them as "\!" or "\?" so that they can be
differentiated from the special characters "!" and "?".
You also need to use "\\" to register "\" as plain preset data.
Example To register "123\!?ABC" as preset data,

send the following command ( Page 7-31):
WP68123\\\!\?ABC CR
Appendix
You cannot register control codes (00h to 2Fh in the ASCII code table, such as CR to STX ),
the start/stop codes, and the check digit as preset data. (Data comparison is also impossible.)
A-19
7 CODE128 Specifications
Code length setting
The start/stop codes and check digit are not included in the code length, or the number of digits to be read.
FNC1 to 4 (function codes), SHIFT, and CODE-A to -C are not added to the code length.
The available range of the code length setting varies depending on the start code (CODE-A to -C) as follows:
CODE-A and CODE-B ...........1 to 74
CODE-C .................................1 to 148
This is because one digit of CODE-A or CODE-B corresponds to two digits of CODE-C.
Data transmission
The start/stop codes and check digit are not sent.
FNC1 to 4 (function codes), SHIFT, and CODE-A to -C are not sent, either.
The control codes are sent as they are.
Note Do not use CODE128 with control codes when using a multi-drop link. This may cause
communication errors.

The number of characters that can be registered as preset data is up to 32 digits for CODE-A or
CODE-B, and up to 64 digits for CODE-C, ad described above.
When "!" or "?" is used in preset data, it functions as the special character "!" or "?" which allows
flexible verification of the preset data ( Page 3-6). CODE128, however, can be used to convert all
ASCII codes into bar code data. Consequently, "!" and "?" themselves may be used in bar code data.
Appendix
If you want to register "!" or "?" as plain preset data, register them as "\!" or "\?" so that they can be
differentiated from the special characters "!" and "?".
You also need to use "\\" to register "\" as plain preset data.
Example To register "123\!?ABC" as preset data, send the following command

( Page 7-31)
WP68123\\\!\?ABC CR
You cannot register control codes (00h to 2Fh in the ASCII code table, such as CR to STX ),
the start/stop codes, the check digit, FNC1 to 4 (function codes), SHIFT, and CODE-A to -C as
preset data. (Data comparison is also impossible.)
GS1-128 reading specifications
Start FNC1 Data 1 Data 2

FNC1 Data 3 Check Stop
code Fixed length Fixed length Fixed length digit code
GS1-128 start pattern Separator
When "GS1-128 support" is selected with the configuration software, the BL-1300 Series operates as
follows. ( Page 4-18)
Since GS1-128 data always starts with the combination of "Start code A to C" + "FNC1" (start pattern),
data starting with other elements causes a read error.
At the end of each set of data that has a variable length, "FNC1" (separator) is used to separate the
data. This "FNC1" is replaced with character "GS" (1Dh of ASCII code) for output.
A-20
8 ITF/2of5/COOP2of5 Specifications
Code length setting
The default setting of the BL-1300 Series specifies 4 digits as the minimum code length for ITF and
2of5. Due to it's the simple barcode structure, 2of5 type bar codes are prone to digit skipping and
erroneous reading. If you set the minimum code length to 1 digit for 2of5 type bar codes (2 digits for
ITF), the bar code type may be misidentified as other types, or non-bar code patterns may be
recognized as 2of5 type bar codes.
To prevent these problems, it is recommended to use ITF, 2of5, COOP2of5 and other similar bar
codes by setting 4 or more digits as the minimum code length and specifying the same value for the
maximum code length.
Limitations on the bar code composition function

Other than using the same value to the maximum and minimum code length, you need to know the
following limitations when using the bar code composition function.
To read ITF codes, be sure to perform the check digit verification.
ITF codes without check digits cannot be read by using the bar code composition function.
The bar code composition function cannot be used for 2of5 and COOP2of5 codes.
Definition of 2of5
The BL-1300 Series can read the following two 2of5 type codes:
Industrial 2of5
Standard 2of5
Other 2of5 codes cannot be read with the BL-1300 Series.
At the present time, standards and specifications do not exist for Industrial 2of5 and Standard 2of5
codes. Consequently, the following structures are defined as Industrial 2of5 and Standard 2of5 which
can be read with the BL-1300 Series.
Appendix
Industrial 2of5
Bar weight
Character Bar pattern
1247P
Applicable character Numbers (0 to 9) only

Number of digits for representation Unlimited
Bar structure characteristics Bars of two widths are used.
One character is represented with five bars (discrete type).
There is always a space which has the same width as a
narrow bar between characters (gap between characters).
One character is expressed with two wide bars and three
narrow bars. The bar structure is noted above.
A-21
8 ITF/2of5/COOP2of5 Specifications
Standard 2of5
Bar weight
Character Bar pattern
1247P
Applicable character Numbers (0 to 9) only

Number of digits for representation Unlimited
Bar structure characteristics Bars of two widths are used.
One character is represented with five bars (discrete type).
There is always a space which has the same width as a
narrow bar between characters (gap between characters).
One character is expressed with two wide bars and three
Appendix
narrow bars. The bar structure is noted above.
It is assumed that the difference between Industrial 2of5 and Standard 2of5 is only the structure of
the start/stop characters. The structure of other characters is considered to be the same.
Since the BL-1300 Series performs reading based on the standards above, the reading may fail if
your Industrial 2of5 or Standard 2of5 code does not fit this criteria.
A-22
9 Concept of Bar Code Position
The "bar code position" used for the bar code position test mode and bar code position check is
determined based on the following approach.
Bar code position range
The angle scanned by the laser beam of the BL-1300 Series is divided into 10,000 equal divisions.
The scanning start angle is 0, and the scanning end angle is 9999.
0 9999
The angle scanned by the laser beam is

divided into divisions 0 to 9999.
Appendix
Right and left end positions of a bar code
The right and left end positions of a bar code are determined based on the bars at both ends. The
inner side of the bar, or the border of the bar and space, is regarded as the end.
* It is assumed that the scanning start side is the left end of a bar code, and the scanning end side is the
right end of a bar code.
A-23
9 Concept of Bar Code Position
Laser beam scanning direction
Quiet zone Quiet zone
Left end Right end
Cautions on using the bar code position data
Distance from the bar code reader

The BL-1300 Series uses the rotation of a polygon mirror to scan the laser beam. Consequently,
even when the same bar code is scanned, the distance between the bar code reader and bar
code surface varies depending on the point hit by the laser beam.
Appendix
Scanning range end = Long distance

Bar code label
Scanning range center = Short distance
Therefore, laser beam (a) scans the inside

of the area scanned by laser beam (b).
b a
The bar code position is determined within the range of the scanning angle which is equally
divided into divisions 0 to 9999. Consequently, the width of a division is narrower at a shorter
distance from the bar code reader; and is wider at a longer distance from the bar code reader.
A-24
10 Checksum Calculation Method
You can add a checksum to the read data to confirm proper transmission.
* The checksum cannot be added to a command or a response to a command.
Adding a checksum enables incorrect data translation to be detected in the RS-232C communication.
By using the PASS/RTRY or ACK/NAK protocol together, you can create a program so that if the checksum
does not match, the request to resend (RTRY or NAK ) command is sent to the BL-1300 Series.
* The checksum cannot be added when the PLC link is used.
Checksum calculation position
The checksum is calculated with all characters except for the header and terminator. The checksum
is added as two ASCII code characters immediately before the terminator.
Data format
Header Read data Checksum Terminator
When the data addition function is used
Header Data size Code type Read data PMI Checksum Terminator
Appendix
Checksum calculation method
This section calculates the checksum (cc) using the read data of "ABC123" as an example.
Convert each character into the ASCII code and express the result as 8-bit binary numbers as shown below.
Calculate the "Exclusive OR" (XOR) of the binary number of each bit.
Header ABC123 Checksum Terminator
ASCII code Bit

A 41h 0100 0001
B 42h 0100 0010
C 43h 0100 0011
1 31h 0011 0001
2 32h 0011 0010
3 33h 0011 0011 +

0111 0000 70h
* Based on the "Exclusive OR" logic, when the number of 1s is an odd number, the calculation result
is 1; and when the number of 1s is an even number, the calculation result is 0.
Convert the calculated hexadecimal number into a two-digit ASCII code number. The result obtained
is the checksum.
Therefore, the checksum for the above example is cc = 70 (37h 30h).
A-25
10 Checksum Calculation Method
Example
Header ERROR Checksum Terminator cc = 58
Header KEYENCE 100% Checksum Terminator cc = 74
TIP Exclusive OR calculation formula

To calculate the numbers of each digit, refer to the following formula.
0+0=0
0+1=1
1+0=1
1+1=0
* + : Operator of Exclusive OR
Conversion from hexadecimal numbers into binary numbers

To convert ASCII codes into binary numbers, refer to the following table.
Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
number
Binary number 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111
Hexadecimal
8 9 A B C D E F
number
Appendix
Binary number 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111
A-26
11 ASCII Code Table
High-order 4 bits
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Binary 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111
0 0000 DLE (SP) O @ P p
1 0001 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 0010 STX DC2 2 B R b r
3 0011 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 0100 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 0101 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 0110 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 0111 BEL ETB 7 G W g w

Low-
Appendix
order
4 bits 8 1000 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 1001 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A 1010 LF SUB * : J Z j z
B 1011 VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C 1100 CL FS , < L \ l |
D 1101 CR GS - = M ] m }
E 1110 SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F 1111 SI US / ? O _ o del
A-27
12 Setup Parameter List
Use this list to note your specified parameter settings for later reference. Please make copies of this
page.
Operation setting
Read mode Single Multi 1 Multi 2 Multi 3 Custom
Data transmission timing After read After trigger input turns off
Repeat-read time setting [ ] ms
Scan count [ ]/s
Decode match count [ ] match(es)
Read condition AGC Cancel AGC
Decode count PMI PMI preset value 1 [ ]
Scan count PMI preset value 2 [ ]
Bar code type Symbology ID
Supplementary
Data addition function Bar code position
information
Bar code
Parameter bank
composition
Label reading
Bar code setting
direction
Read error code [ ]
Trigger input setting

Level One-shot input time [ ] ms
Signal type One-shot Auto-trigger scan count [ ] scans
Auto-trigger Auto-trigger resume time [ ] ms
Command for trigger ON [ ]
Appendix
Command for trigger OFF [ ]

Start test mode at power-on None Reading ratio Tact measurement Bar code position
Communication setting
Baud rate [ ] bits/s
Data length 7 bits 8 bits
Parity None 1 bit 2 bits
Stop bits 1 bit 2 bits
RTS/CTS protocol Disable Enable
Separation character [ ]
Intermediate delimiter [ ]
Protocol No handshaking PASS/RTRY ACK/NAK
Data size Disable Enable
Checksum Disable Enable
Header None STX ESC Setting value [ ]
Terminator CR ETX CR + LF Setting value [ ]
Transmission delay time [ ] ms
Multi-drop Disable Enable ID No. [ ]
PLC link Disable Enable
Connected PLC Mitsubishi MELSEC KEYENCE KV Omron SYSMAC
PLC trigger area Enable Disable
DM head address [ ] Station No. [ ]
1 byte/address 2 bytes/address (High-order Low-order)
Data storage mode
2 bytes/address (Low-order High-order)
File register Disable Enable Block number [ ]
A-28
Terminal setting
Terminal Trigger input Register preset data Start test mode Set Auto-trigger Laser lock
function Motor lock Reset PLC link error Read batch-setting bar code No assignment
IN1 terminal
Test Mode Reading ratio Tact measurement Bar code position
function
TIMING LED Synchronize ON at power-on ON
Input polarity N.O. contact N.C. contact Input time constant [ ] ms
Terminal Trigger input Register preset data Start test mode Set Auto-trigger Laser lock
function Motor lock Reset PLC link error Read batch-setting bar code No assignment
IN2 terminal
Test Mode Reading ratio Tact measurement Bar code position
function
TIMING LED Synchronize ON at power-on ON
Input polarity N.O. contact N.C. contact Input time constant [ ] ms
OUT1 OK NG ERROR PRESET POSITION Output ON time
terminal TRG BUSY LOCK BUSY MODE BUSY ERR BUSY [ ] ms
Appendix
A-29
Bar code setting

Setting item Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8
Bar code type [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Max. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Code length
Min. [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
CODE39, CODABAR, ITF

Validate check digit
CODE39, NW-8, ITF

Send check digit
CODE39

Send start/stop character
CODABAR Not send Not send Not send Not send Not send Not send Not send Not send
Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case Lower-case
Send start/stop character Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case Upper-case
CODABAR
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Check digit type
JAN13 JAN13 JAN13 JAN13 JAN13 JAN13 JAN13 JAN13
UPC/EAN selection JAN8 JAN8 JAN8 JAN8 JAN8 JAN8 JAN8 JAN8
UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E UPC-E
13 digits 13 digits 13 digits 13 digits 13 digits 13 digits 13 digits 13 digits
No. of UPC-A output
12 digits 12 digits 12 digits 12 digits 12 digits 12 digits 12 digits 12 digits
Add UPC-E system code

"0"
14-digit output for GTIN

support
GS1-128 support
GS1 DataBar (Truncated)

support
GS1 DataBar Stacked

(Omnidirectional) support
GS1 DataBar (Limited)

support
Appendix
GS1 DataBar (Expanded)

support
GS1 DataBar Expanded

Stacked support
Read Industrial2of5
Read Standard2of5
Use bar code composition
Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Output Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward
Maximum Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse
code length Effective
output [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
digits
function
Starting
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
digit
Specify label reading Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward
direction Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse
Other settings
STABILITY LED Use STABILITY LED indication

Verify/preset function Perform verification Preset data [ ]
Quiet zone scale [ ] times Decode cancel count [ ] match(es)
Test button function Normal operation Register preset data Set Auto-trigger
Silent Mode At OK At NG At ERROR Test mode
Left end [ ]
Bar code position check
Right end [ ]
A-30
Custom setting
Laser off timing After conditions are met After trigger input turns off
Data determination
After conditions are met After trigger input turns off
timing
Data transmission
After conditions are met After trigger input turns off
timing
OK/ERROR priority Higher priority on OK Higher priority on ERROR
Data output order Based on time Based on condition No. Based on position
[ ] ms
timer
Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8
Bar code [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Condition 1
Condition 2
Condition Condition 3
setting Condition 4
Condition 5
Condition 6
Condition 7
Condition 8
Parameter bank
Bank No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Alternate
Appendix
Scale [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Gain
Coefficient [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Sensitivity [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Averaging [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Bar width correction [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Correction value [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Scan count [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Scan count for
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
parameter change
Retry scan count [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
A-31
13 Default Setting List
The BL-1300 Series is factory-configured with the following parameter settings.
Operation setting
Read mode Single label read mode
Data transmission timing After read
Scan count 500 scans/s
Decode match count 2
Read condition AGC mode
Read error code ERROR
Trigger input setting

Signal type Level signal trigger
Start test mode at power-on None
Command for trigger ON LON
Command for trigger OFF LOFF
Bar code setting

Setting item Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8
Bar code type CODE39 CODABAR JAN/EAN CODE128 GS1 DataBar ITF 2of5 CODE93
Maximum code
74 74 - 74 74 74 74 74
length
Minimum code
3 5 - 1 1 4 4 1
length
Validate check digit No No - - - No - -
Send start/stop
Appendix
No Yes - - - - - -
character
Case of start/stop
- Lower-case - - - - - -
character
JAN type code to be JAN13

- - JAN8 - - - - -
read UPC-E
No. of UPC-A output - - 13 - - - - -
Add UPC-E system
- - No - - - - -
code "0"
GS-128 support - - - No - - - -
GS1 DataBar type
- - - - Read all - - -
code to be read
2of5 type code to be Industrial
- - - - - - -
read 2of5
Use bar code -
No No No No No No No
composition
Maximum code
length output
Specify label
reading direction
Communication setting
Baud rate 9600 bits/s Protocol No handshaking
Data length 7 bits Data size Disable
Parity Even Checksum Disable
Stop bits 1 bit Header None
RTS/CTS protocol Disable Terminator CR
Separation character : (0x3A) Transmission delay time 0 ms
Intermediate delimiter , (0x2C) PLC link Disable
Multi-drop Disable
A-32
13 Default Setting List
Terminal setting
Input Input time

Input terminal Terminal function TIMING LED ON at power-on
polarity constant
IN1 terminal N.O.
Trigger input Synchronize Disable 2 ms
function contact
IN2 terminal N.O.
Register preset data Disable Disable 2 ms
function contact
Output
Function Output ON time
terminal
OUT1 OK 500 ms
OUT2 NG ERROR 500 ms
OUT3 ERROR 500 ms
OUT4 TRG BUSY LOCK BUSY MODE BUSY ERR BUSY 500 ms
Other settings
STABILITY LED Disable

Perform verification Enable
Preset data None
Quiet zone scale 7 times
Decode cancel count 0
Test button function Normal operation
Silent Mode Disable
Bar code position check Disable
Appendix
A-33
MEMO
MEMO
Revision History
Revision Version Revision Details
July 2008 Ver 1.0

January 2010 Revised 1st edition Correction of errors and screens of AutoID Navigator
April 2010 2nd revision 1st edition
August 2012 2nd revision 2nd edition
November 2013 2nd revision 3rd edition Windows 8 has been added to the target operating
systems. Errors have been corrected.
December 2013 3rd revision 1st edition
WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one
(1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be
defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for
inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund
the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and
mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air.
Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions,
and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyers intended use. KEYENCE
will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written
specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any
way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold
KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/
Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY
PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS OR
INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF
KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTYS
CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the
foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and
written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2013 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 058108E 1123-1 374GB Printed in Japan

BL-1300 Um 374GB GB WW 1123-1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BL-1300 Um 374GB GB WW 1123-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

374GB

Laser Bar Code Reader

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

Model BL-1300, 1301, 1300HA, 1301HA, 1350HA, 1351HA, 1370, 1371

Laser emission warning LED (LASER LED)

BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/1301HA/ BL-1350HA/1351HA

CAUTION Precautions on use

Do not carry the BL-1300 Series by the cables.

Measures against abnormal conditions

Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations

Canada IC (Industry Canada) regulations

Item 2: Limited reproduction

Item 7: Termination of contract

Item 8: Applicable laws

1-1 Package Contents List and the BL Series Lineup .........................................1-2

Chapter 2 Connection and Wiring

2-1 Connecting the BL-1300 Series to the Dedicated Communication Unit......2-2

Chapter 3 Functions of the BL-1300 Series

3-1 Basic Operation ................................................................................................3-2

Chapter 4 AutoID Navigator Operation

4-1 Installing, starting, and quitting AutoID Navigator ........................................4-2

5-1 Installing the BL-1300 Series...........................................................................5-2

Chapter 6 Operation of the BL-1300 Series

6-1 Read Operation .................................................................................................6-2

Chapter 7 Serial Communication

7-1 Serial Communication Outline ........................................................................7-2

Chapter 8 PLC Link

8-1 Outline of the PLC Link ....................................................................................8-2

9-1 Control Using CC-Link .....................................................................................9-2

Chapter 10 Ethernet Communication

10-1 Overview of the N-L1 ......................................................................................10-2

1 BL-1300 Series Specifications....................................................................... A-2

1-1 Package Contents List and the BL Series Lineup...1-2

contents before use.

Laser bar code reader

Mounting screw (M3): 2

Mounting bracket Instruction manual

BL- 1300/1301/1300HA/ Laser Bar Code Reader

Class 2 Laser Product

Class 2 Laser Product

Mounting bracket A and B: 1 each Mounting bracket: 1

Laser forced OFF command

Safety precautions on laser product

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

Laser warning seal set: 1

Dedicated communication unit 1

RS-422A terminal layout label

N-UB N-L1 Instruction manual

96M00269 Locate the cables as far as possible from high-voltage

Foreign Regulations and Standards

RS-422A/485 Output Type precautions specified in the manual.

described in the manual N-R4

For use with nuclear power control, railway, aircraft, vehicles,

Foreign Regulations and Standards

incinerators, medical equipment, entertainment equipment, safety

For use in applications where death or serious property damage is

possible and extensive safety precautions are required.

For use under circumstances or environments which are not

RS-422A/485 Output Type precautions specified in the manual.

described in the manual

For use with nuclear power control, railway, aircraft, vehicles,

For properly using the product

incinerators, medical equipment, entertainment equipment, safety